JP2020138090A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine allowing a player to visually recognize light applied toward a cylindrical member in a mode being moved in a direction inclined relative to an axial center of the cylindrical member.SOLUTION: Since a plurality of rows of low-transmittance parts 1511 are formed while being inclined to an axis center of a cylindrical member 1200 in a decoration member 1500 arranged in a mode for shielding the cylindrical member 1200, light visible in a mode so as to be moved in an axial direction of the cylindrical member 1200 following visual recognition in a mode in which a low-transmittance part 1230 of the cylindrical member 1200 is moved in an axial direction of the cylindrical member 1200 by rotation of the cylindrical member 1200 is visually recognized by a player in a mode for traveling along the low-transmittance part 1511 of the decoration member 1500.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 13

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a diffusion member arranged on a game board and a light irradiation device arranged on the back side of the diffusion member, and the light emitted from the light irradiation device is emitted by the diffusion member. There is known a gaming machine that is diffused and illuminates a decorative member arranged on the front side of the diffusion member (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-113910

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the mode in which the light emitted from the light irradiation device is visually recognized by the player is limited. That is, for example, the position where the diffusing member is illuminated is determined by the position of the light source of the light irradiation device, and the position where the diffusing member is illuminated (light pattern) does not change no matter how much the light emitting state of the light source is changed. Therefore, the mode of light visually recognized by the player is limited, and there is a problem that the effect of the light emitted from the light irradiation device is limited.

Therefore, the applicant of the present application has arranged a tubular member on the front side of the light irradiation device in addition to the above-mentioned gaming machine, and a pattern is formed by the difference in the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member. , A gaming machine has been developed in which the visible pattern is changed by the rotation of the tubular member, and the way the tubular member shines is changed (not known at the time of filing the application of the present application). However, in this case, it is suitable to visually recognize the light as if it is moved in the axial direction or the direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member, but for example, it is visually recognized that the light is moved in the direction inclined to the axial center. It had the problem that it was difficult to make it.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and is an embodiment in which the light emitted toward the tubular member is moved in a direction inclined with respect to the axial center of the tubular member. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can be visually recognized by a player.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 is a tubular member that is rotatably supported by a game board and has a light transmitting portion, and light irradiation that irradiates light toward the tubular member. The device is provided with a device and a decorative member having a light transmitting portion while being arranged in a manner of shielding the tubular member. The tubular member is a portion having a low light transmittance, and the tubular member is provided. The game board is provided with a low transmittance portion formed in a spiral shape along the peripheral surface of the light beam and formed in such a manner that the position visually recognized in one direction is changed by rotating the tubular member. It is rotated by transmitting the kinetic energy of the flowing sphere, and the light emitted from the light irradiating device is visually recognized through the tubular member, and the decorative member is a portion having low light transmittance and is a plurality of parts. It has a low transmittance portion that is formed in a row and extends in a strip shape along a direction inclined with respect to the axial center of the tubular member.

The fact that the tubular member has a light transmitting portion means that the tubular member has a portion that transmits light at least in a part. In this sense, the mode of the tubular member is not particularly limited. For example, the tubular member itself may be formed of a light-transmitting material, or the tubular member shields light from the light-transmitting material. It may be formed from the material to be used.

The fact that the decorative member has a light transmitting portion means that the decorative member has a portion that transmits light at least in a part. In this sense, the mode of the decorative member is not particularly limited, and for example, the decorative member itself may be formed of a light-transmitting material, and the decorative member includes a light-transmitting material and a material that shields light. May be formed from.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the cross-sectional shape of the decorative member in a plane perpendicular to the extending direction of the low transmittance portion of the decorative member is the plurality of rows of the decorative member. It is formed in a concave shape between the adjacent low-transmittance portions among the low-transmittance portions of the above.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the decorative member is extended so as to intersect the low transmittance portion of the decorative member formed in a plurality of rows. At the same time, the widthwise dimension of the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the extending direction is shortened as it approaches the overhanging end, and both side surfaces in the width direction are formed in a curved surface shape recessed toward the decorative member. It has a strip-shaped part.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 has the strip-shaped portion formed on one side of the low transmittance portion of at least one of the decorative members in the gaming machine according to claim 3. The forming position of the upper part of the band and the forming position of the band-shaped portion formed on the other side opposite to the one side are shifted in the extending direction of the low transmittance portion.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a plurality of rows of low-transmittance portions are formed on the decorative member arranged in a manner of shielding the tubular member so as to be inclined to the axial center of the tubular member. Light that is visually recognized in a mode in which the low transmittance portion of the tubular member is moved in the axial direction of the tubular member due to the rotation of the member and is moved in the axial direction of the tubular member. It can be visually recognized by the player in a manner of being moved along the low transmittance portion of the decorative member.

Further, by rotating the tubular member, the position of the low transmittance portion in one-way view is changed. Therefore, the rotation of the tubular member changes the distribution of the degree of brightness of the light emitted from the light irradiator, which is visually recognized through the tubular member in one-way view. That is, since the pattern formed by the difference in the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member can be changedly formed, it is possible to increase the mode of producing the light emitted from the light irradiating device.

Further, the tubular member is rotated by the kinetic energy of the ball flowing down the game board. Therefore, since a drive motor for rotating the tubular member is not required, the power cost required for rotating the tubular member can be reduced.

Further, the tubular member can be installed in a space-saving manner because the drive motor is not arranged. That is, the space for arranging the accessory such as the tubular member on the front side of the game board or the back side of the game board is limited to a certain range, but the drive motor for rotating the tubular member does not need to be arranged. The usable space can be utilized as a space for arranging other moving accessories. Therefore, the degree of freedom in disposing of other moving accessories can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, the concave surface shape is formed by forming the cross-sectional shape between adjacent low transmittance portions of the decorative member into a concave surface shape. The light visually recognized through the portion is visually reduced in the direction of connecting the adjacent low transmittance portions due to the action of the concave surface shape. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine the boundary of the light divided by the low transmittance unit.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, when the light moving along the low transmittance portion crosses the strip-shaped portion, both sides of the strip-shaped portion. Due to the action of the concave surface shape formed by forming the surface in a curved surface shape recessed on the decorative member side, the surface is reduced in the width direction of the strip-shaped portion and visually recognized. Therefore, the outer shape of the light to be moved can be reduced in the process of movement, or the reduced state can be returned to the original state to change the outer shape of the light.

According to the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to the third aspect, when the light is visually recognized in a mode of being moved along the low transmittance portion, one low transmittance portion is used. The width of one low transmittance part is reduced by reducing the outer shape of light on one side in the width direction of the light, while maintaining the outer shape of light on the other side, which is the opposite side of the other side. Since the change in the outer shape of the light is different on both sides of the direction, it is possible to easily discriminate the change in the outer shape of the light.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the light effect device in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a light effect device. It is a partial cross-sectional view of an introduction cylinder, a tubular member and a guide member in an assembled state. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional views of a tubular member and a guide member, and (d) is a side view of the tubular member in the direction of arrow VIIId of FIG. 8 (b). It is a partial cross-sectional view of a tubular member viewed in cross section in a plane passing through the axial center of the tubular member. It is a front view of the light effect device in an assembled state. (A) to (c) are front views of the light effect device. (A) is a front view of the decorative member, (b) is a rear view of the decorative member, and (c) is a side view of the decorative member in the direction of arrow XIIc of FIG. 12 (a). (D) is a partial cross-sectional view of the decorative member in the line XIId-XIid of FIG. 12 (a), and (e) is a partial side view of the decorative member in the direction of arrow XIIe of FIG. 12 (a). It is a front view of the light production device. It is a schematic diagram which schematically illustrated the path of light. (A) to (c) are partially enlarged front views of the light effect device. (A) and (b) are front views of the light effect device. It is a front perspective view of the light effect device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of a tubular member. (A) is a front view of a tubular member and a light irradiation device, and (b) is a side view of the tubular member and a light irradiation device. (A) is a front view of a tubular member and a light irradiation device, and (b) is a side view of the tubular member and a light irradiation device. (A) is a top view of the light irradiation device, (b) is a front view of the light irradiation device, and (c) is a side view of the light irradiation device. (A) and (b) are top views of the tubular member and the light irradiation device, and (c) and (d) are front views of the tubular member and the light irradiation device. It is a development view of a tubular member. (A) is a front view of the decorative member, (b) is a rear view of the decorative member, and (c) is a top view of the decorative member. (A) to (c) are front views of a tubular member, a guide member, and a decorative member in an assembled state. (A) to (c) are front views of a tubular member, a guide member, and a decorative member in an assembled state. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged front views of decorative members. It is a front perspective view of the light effect device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a top view of the main body of the tubular member, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission portion in the line XXIXb-XXIXb of FIG. 29 (a), and FIG. 29 (c) is a sectional view of the transmission portion. It is sectional drawing of the transmission part in XXIXc-XXIXc line of). It is sectional drawing of the introduction cylinder and the tubular member. (A) to (c) are front views of the light effect device. It is a front perspective view of the light effect device in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a side view of a tubular member and a light irradiation device, and (b) and (c) are top views of a tubular member and a light irradiation device. (A) and (b) are top views of the base portion and the refraction member of the light irradiation device. It is a front view of a tubular member and a light irradiation apparatus. It is a front view of a tubular member and a light irradiation apparatus. (A) is a top view of the tubular member according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the tubular member. (A) is a top view of the tubular member and the light irradiation device, and (b) is a front view of the tubular member and the light irradiation device. (A) is a top view of the tubular member and the light irradiation device, and (b) is a front view of the tubular member and the light irradiation device. (A) is a top view of the tubular member and the light irradiation device, and (b) is a front view of the tubular member and the light irradiation device.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 16, one embodiment in the case where the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 as a first embodiment will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength (launching intensity) corresponding to the above, and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, and a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance and a windmill (movable member 310 are shown. (Not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, through gate 67, variable display device. The unit 80 and the like are assembled to form a peripheral portion thereof, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the game board 13 and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened more than in the normal state. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one time. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while synchronizing the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, the light effect device 1000 is arranged on the left side of the third symbol display device 81 in the front view. The light effect device 1000 is a device that performs an effect of moving the light emitted from the back surface in the vertical direction, and the details will be described later.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol string is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol string, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal period. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many chances that the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through. It is configured in. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. (See FIG. 4), a big hit lottery is made, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. (See FIG. 4), a big hit lottery is made, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). (State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" The symbol "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular first specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. Further, a second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, and has a circular shape having a size substantially the same as that of the other winning openings 63, 64, 640 in the substantially central portion thereof. A second specific winning opening 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the special winning openings 65a and 650a, which are normally closed, are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning openings 65a and 650a are closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (a large opening solenoid) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. (Not shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

Specifically, the second variable winning device 650 is an opening which is a guide path for guiding the ball to the second specific winning opening 650a and an opening opposite to the second specific winning opening 650a side of the guide path. A small opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening and closing of the 651, the driving accessory 650b for opening and closing the opening 651, and the driving accessory 650b in the left-right direction around the lower side of the opening 651 (not shown). And have. The second specific winning opening 650a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the small opening solenoid is driven to tilt the driving accessory 650b to the right to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the second specific winning opening 650a. It operates so as to alternate between the closed state and the closed state of time.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are set for a predetermined time. During the opening of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is set for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning openings 65a and 650a. A gaming state that is released a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special gaming state. Further, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are not limited to one, and one or more or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or Not limited to the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71 and a second out port 72. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are discharged through the first out opening 71 or the second out opening 72 (not shown). You will be guided to the road. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64, while the second out opening 72 is arranged on the left side of the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, the second out port 72 is arranged on the opposite side of the first out port 71 with the second specific winning opening 650a interposed therebetween.

Therefore, the ball that flows down the game area and reaches the lower end (inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side (right side in FIG. 2) of the second specific winning opening 650a in front view is the inner rail. It flows down along the inclination of 61 or the outer edge member 73 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the first out port 71, while the lower end of the game area (inner rail 61) on the left side of the front view from the second specific winning port 650a. ) Is flown down along the inclination (curvature) of the inner rail 61, and is guided to the ball discharge path through the second out port 72.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the like is performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6, the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the left side of the front view, and has a tubular member 1200, a guide member 1300, a light irradiation device 1400, and a decorative member 1500. The structure of the light effect device 1000 composed of the above will be described.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the light effect device 1000, and FIG. 6 is a front exploded perspective view of the light effect device 1000. Note that FIG. 6 shows a state in which the first half-cylinder member 1201 having a shape obtained by dividing the tubular member 1200 in half by a plane including the axis is arranged on the back side, and the first half-cylinder member 1201 The illustration of the second half-cylinder member 1202 (see FIG. 5) which forms a pair and is arranged on the front side is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the light effect device 1000 is formed below the outer wall portion 82 erected in a wall shape on the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). More specifically, the outer wall 82 is formed with a hole through which a ball can flow down, and below the hole is a metal introduction cylinder 83 for which the tubular member 1200 of the light effect device 1000 is externally fitted. It will be extended.

That is, the light effect device 1000 is arranged in a path through which the ball passes when flowing down the introduction cylinder 83, and is a tubular member 1200 rotatably fitted into the introduction cylinder 83. A guide member 1300 (see FIG. 6) formed on the inner surface side of the tubular member 1200 and guiding the sphere in a predetermined path, and a non-rotatably externally fitted to the introduction cylinder 83 and toward the tubular member 1200. It includes a light irradiation device 1400 that irradiates light, and a decorative member 1500 that is arranged on the front side of the tubular member 1200 and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material.

Examples of the resin material include resin materials such as PET, PC, and acrylic.

Explaining the positional relationship between the tubular member 1200, the guide member 1300, the light irradiation device 1400, and the decorative member 1500, the decorative member 1500 is arranged on the front side closest to the player, and the decorative member 1500 has a tubular shape on the back side of the decorative member 1500. A member 1200 and a guide member 1300 (see FIG. 6) included in the tubular member 1200 are arranged, and a light irradiation device 1400 is arranged on the back side of the tubular member 1200 and the guide member 1300. Here, since the decorative member 1500 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, the decorative member 1500 is visually recognized through the decorative member 1500, and the tubular member 1200 arranged on the back side of the decorative member 1500 is visually recognized. be able to.

The tubular member 1200 is assembled into a tubular shape having a circular cross section by fitting the first half tubular member 1201 and the second half tubular member 1202 to each other, and is outside the introduction cylinder 83 in the assembled state (see FIG. 5). The outer fitting shaft is rotatably supported in the fitting groove 83a (see FIG. 6). At this time, since the tubular member 1200 is cantilevered and pivotally supported by the introduction cylinder 83, friction during rotation of the tubular member 1200 does not occur at both ends of the tubular member 1200, and the sliding end portion 1211 It is limited to the friction generated in. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the friction of the tubular member 1200 during rotation.

Further, the tubular member 1200 is formed by providing a sliding end portion 1211 outerly fitted in the outer fitting groove 83a of the introduction cylinder 83 at one end portion and expanding the diameter from one end portion toward the other. In addition, the diameter-expanded portion 1210 formed of a metal material and the other end of the diameter-expanded portion 1210 opposite to one end are fitted and fixed, and have a cylindrical shape having the same diameter in the axial direction. It also includes a main body portion 1220 formed of a light-transmitting resin material. That is, the tubular member 1200 is assembled by fitting a total of four members, a diameter-expanded portion 1210 formed of a pair of semi-cylindrical members and a main body portion 1220 formed of a pair of semi-cylindrical members, to each other. It is formed by being done.

The method of fitting the four members forming the tubular member 1200 is not particularly limited. For example, fitting claws (not shown) are formed in opposite directions of the respective members, and the claws are fitted. For example, a columnar convex portion (not shown) is formed at a position where the members face each other, and a columnar convex portion is formed at a position corresponding to the columnar convex portion. A method may also be used in which a circular hole (not shown) having a diameter slightly smaller than the diameter of the convex portion is formed, and each member is fitted by fitting the cylindrical convex portion into the circular hole.

Since the enlarged diameter portion 1210 is formed of a metal material, it is possible to prevent the member from being deformed or scraped when the sliding end portion 1211 is slid into the outer fitting groove 83a, and the tubular member 1200 can be prevented from being deformed or scraped. Durability can be improved. Further, even if the tubular member 1200 becomes difficult to rotate due to sliding friction, the tubular member 1200 can be easily rotated by putting oil between the introduction cylinder 83 and the enlarged diameter portion 1210 of the tubular member 1200. can do. Examples of the metal material forming the enlarged diameter portion 1210 include brass and aluminum.

The main body portion 1220 is formed so as to project from the upper end portion to the lower end portion in a double spiral shape on the inner peripheral surface thereof, and the upper side surface (upper side in FIG. 7) is in contact with the sphere flowing down along the guide member 1300. A peripheral surface portion 1230 that is in contact with the low transmittance portion 1230 and a peripheral surface portion 1240 that is a peripheral surface other than the peripheral surface on which the low transmittance portion 1230 is formed and has a constant radial thickness. The end opposite to the end that is connected is opened. The cross-sectional shape of the low transmittance portion 1230 will be described later.

The guide member 1300 is a member that serves as a rail for allowing a ball flowing down inside the introduction cylinder 83 to flow down in a predetermined path, and is formed of a colorless and light-transmitting elastic material such as silicon rubber, and is formed of the introduction cylinder 83. The ring portion 1310 that is externally fitted and fixed to the tip portion, and the ring portion 1310 that extends from the right end of the lower end portion of FIG. 6 in the front view toward the lower left, and the main body portion 1220 of the tubular member 1200 in the assembled state (see FIG. 5). A sliding portion 1320 formed so as to approach the side surface of the sliding portion from the inside, a fall guide portion 1330 extending vertically downward from the extending end of the sliding portion 1320, and a ball of the fall guide portion 1330 flowing down. A thickening portion 1340 formed by thickening on the side (left side in FIG. 6), and a guide portion 1350 extending in a guide shape from both front side and back side surfaces of the sliding portion 1320 and the drop guide portion 1330. To be equipped.

The distance between the guide portions 1350 is formed to be slightly larger than that of the flowing sphere, and the sliding portion 1320, the fall guide portion 1330, and the thickening portion 1340 are centered on the side surface on the side where the sphere flows down with a radius of curvature larger than the radius of the sphere. Is formed in the shape of a recessed half pipe, so that when it comes into contact with the flowing ball, a force is applied to the ball toward the center side of the sliding portion 1320, the fall guide portion 1330, and the thickening portion 1340. Therefore, the ball that comes into contact with the low transmittance portion 1230 can flow down while being brought close to the central axis of the sliding portion 1320, the drop guide portion 1330, and the thickening portion 1340. As a result, when the ball flows down, the ball comes into contact with the guide member 1300 to prevent the ball from moving in the horizontal direction, and the ball can be effectively flowed down vertically.

The sliding portion 1320 is formed to have a thin wall shape, and its shape is maintained when a single ball is arranged on the sliding portion 1320, but when a predetermined number or more of balls are arranged on the sliding portion 1320, the sliding portion 1320 is formed in a thin shape. It is formed in such a manner that it is bent and deformed by the weight of the sphere.

The light irradiation device 1400 irradiates the tubular member 1200 and the decorative member 1500 with light from the back surface side, and a plurality of base portions 1410 that are externally fitted and fixed to the introduction cylinder 83 and a plurality of base portions 1410 fixed to the front side of the base portion 1410. A light source 1420 is provided. In the present embodiment, four light sources 1420 are arranged on the central axis of the base portion 1410, that is, in the front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 5), on the axis of the tubular member 1200 at equal intervals in the vertical direction. To.

The base portion 1410 has a fitting portion 1411 having a recessed portion outerly fitted and fixed to the introduction cylinder 83 at one end, a fastening hole 1412 formed in the fitting portion 1411, and one end of the fitting portion 1411. It is formed of a resin material and includes a rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 1413 that extends vertically downward from the other end portion that is the opposite end portion of the portion and has a light source 1420 arranged on the front side. ..

The fastening hole 1412 is fastened and fixed to the side surface of the game board 13 by a fastening screw (not shown) in the assembled state (see FIG. 5). Therefore, the light irradiation device 1400 is immovably fixed to the game board 13.

Since the light source 1420 irradiates light with weak directivity in a mode in which the front direction (thickness direction) of the base portion 1410 is the output direction, in the assembled state (see FIG. 5), if it is only near the axis of the tubular member 1200. Instead, the entire area including the position separated from the axis of the tubular member 1200 is irradiated with light. Further, the light emitted from the light source 1420 has the highest degree of brightness near the axis of the tubular member 1200, and the degree of brightness is weakened as the distance from the axis is increased (that is, the axis of the tubular member 1200). The output direction of the light source 1420 is directed toward the center). The decorative member 1500 is a member for visually recognizing the movement of light along the formed wavy pattern, and the details will be described later.

The light output direction of the light source 1420 means the direction in which the luminous intensity of the light emitted from the light source 1420 is the strongest, and the same applies to each embodiment described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the positional relationship between the tubular member 1200 and the guide member 1300 in the assembled state will be described.

FIG. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the introduction cylinder 83, the tubular member 1200, and the guide member 1300 in the assembled state. In addition, it passes through the central axis of the introduction cylinder 83 and is cross-sectionally viewed in a plane parallel to the game board 13 (see FIG. 2).

As shown in FIG. 7, in the assembled state, the drop guide portion 1330 of the guide member 1300 is arranged along the inner peripheral surface of the tubular member 1200. The ball passes through the introduction cylinder 83, reaches the guide member 1300, flows down on the sliding portion 1320 (flowing position P1), reaches the falling guide portion 1330 (flowing position P2), and then reaches the thickening portion 1340. (Flow position P3).

The drop guide portion 1330 is formed with a thickening portion 1340 from a position lowered by a predetermined distance from the upper end portion, but the tubular member 1200 is formed up to a position lowered by a predetermined distance from the upper end portion (for example, the flow position P2). A position where the distance between the overhanging end 1231 of the low permeability portion 1230 and the side surface of the drop guide portion 1330 facing the overhanging end 1231 is formed larger than the diameter of the sphere and the thickened portion 1340 is formed (for example, the flow-down position). In P3), the distance between the overhanging end portion 1231 of the low transmission rate portion 1230 and the side surface of the thickening portion 1340 facing the overhanging end portion 1231 is formed to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere.

That is, when the sphere is at the flow-down position P2, the distance between the guide member 1300 and the overhanging end portion 1231 of the tubular member 1200 is formed larger than the diameter of the sphere, so that the sphere can flow down on the guide member 1300. Will be done. On the other hand, when the sphere is at the flow-down position P3, the distance between the guide member 1300 and the overhanging end portion 1231 of the tubular member 1200 is formed to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere, so that the sphere comes into contact with the low transmittance portion 1230. And stopped.

Therefore, a force is applied from the sphere to the low transmittance portion 1230. Here, since the low transmittance portion 1230 is spirally formed on the tubular member 1200, the force in the gravity direction of the dropped sphere is directed to the extending direction of the low transmittance portion 1230. (See FIG. 8D) and the directional component F2 (see FIG. 8D) directed in the direction facing the low transmittance unit 1230. A part of the directional component F2 becomes a force acting on the tubular member 1200 in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the tubular member 1200 moves the contact position of the low transmittance portion 1230 with the sphere vertically downward (upper surface of FIG. 7). It is rotated counterclockwise) in the visual sense.

Next, the mechanism of rotation of the tubular member 1200 will be described with reference to FIG. 8 (a) to 8 (c) are views for explaining the process in which the sphere rotates the tubular member 1200 in chronological order, and are cross-sectional views of the tubular member 1200 and the guide member 1300. FIG. (D) is a side view of the tubular member 1200 in the direction of arrow VIIId of FIG. 8 (b). 8 (a) to 8 (c) are cross-sectionally viewed in a plane passing through the central axis of the introduction cylinder 83 and parallel to the game board 13 (see FIG. 2), and FIG. 8 (b) is shown in FIG. The state in which the sphere has flowed down a predetermined distance from the state shown in (a) is shown, and FIG. 8 (c) shows the state in which the sphere has flowed down a predetermined distance from the state shown in FIG. 8 (b).

As shown in FIG. 8A, before the sphere reaches the thickening portion 1340, the sphere does not abut on the low transmittance portion 1230 and flows down along the fall guide portion 1330.

As shown in FIG. 8B, when the sphere is brought into contact with the low transmittance portion 1230 of the tubular member 1200, the force of the directional component F2 acts on the low transmittance portion 1230 (see FIG. 8D). The tubular member 1200 is rotated around the introduction cylinder 83 in the rotation direction R1 (counterclockwise when viewed from above) along the direction of the directional component F2. Here, the sphere is restricted from moving in the horizontal direction (for example, in the left-right direction in FIG. 8D) on the inner peripheral surfaces of the thickened portion 1340, the guide portion 1350, and the tubular member 1200 of the guide member 1300. Therefore, the sphere is prevented from being separated from the low transmittance portion 1230, and the force of the directional component F2 can be effectively applied in the rotation direction of the tubular member 1200.

As shown in FIG. 8B, when the tubular member 1200 is rotated in the rotation direction R1 by the directional component F2 (see FIG. 8D), the contact point between the sphere and the low transmittance portion 1230 becomes tubular. It is moved below the member 1200 (downward in FIG. 8B). Then, as the tubular member 1200 is continuously rotated, as shown in FIG. 8C, the sphere reaches the lower end of the tubular member 1200 and is discharged downward from the lower end of the tubular member 1200. Returned to the game area.

That is, since the driving force for rotating the tubular member 1200 is generated by the flow of the sphere, the drive motor for rotating the tubular member 1200 is not required, so that the power cost required for rotating the tubular member 1200 is reduced. can do.

Further, the tubular member 1200 can be installed in a space-saving manner because the drive motor is not arranged. That is, the space for arranging the accessory such as the tubular member 1200 on the front side of the game board or the back side of the game board is limited to a certain range, but the drive motor for rotating the tubular member 1200 is not required to be arranged. The space that can be used as a result can be utilized as a space for arranging other moving accessories. Therefore, the degree of freedom in disposing of other moving accessories can be improved.

Further, after the sphere changes the appearance of the tubular member 1200 by rotating the tubular member 1200 (see FIG. 11), the ball obtained by rotating the tubular member 1200 is discharged from the lower end of the tubular member 1200. It is possible to return to the game area again. In this case, for example, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball obtained by rotating the tubular member 1200 is inevitably discharged out of the game area, so that the player is not disadvantaged in the number of winnings. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Here, the sphere is dropped along the tubular member 1200 by the action of gravity, and the tubular member 1200 is continuously rotated by receiving a force due to gravity from the dropped sphere, so that the tubular member 1200 is The sphere is continuously rotated while falling on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member 1200.

Further, even if the speed of the ball flowing down the game area is irregular, the ball flows down along the sliding portion 1320 of the introduction cylinder 83 and the guide member 1300 by the time the ball comes into contact with the tubular member 1200. Since the speed of the sphere is decelerated to the extent that irregularity is not recognized due to the collision force and frictional force given at that time, fluctuations in the flow speed of the sphere that rotates the tubular member 1200 are suppressed, and the tubular member is accompanied by this. The fluctuation of the rotation speed of 1200 is suppressed. Therefore, even when a sphere having an irregular flow speed or flow direction is used as the driving force, the mode of rotation of the tubular member 1200 can be made regular (continuous, small speed fluctuation).

It will be described back to FIG. The tubular member 1200 is rotated due to the ball falling vertically downward along the thickening portion 1340, and when the ball comes into contact with the low transmittance portion 1230 at the lower end of the sliding portion 1320, the ball is vertical. By contacting the low transmittance portion 1230 before it starts to fall downward, only a force directed in the radial direction of the tubular member 1200 is generated, and there is a possibility that a rotational force cannot be applied to the tubular member 1200.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, before the sphere reaches the thickening portion 1340, the sphere does not abut on the low transmittance portion 1230 of the tubular member 1200, and the sphere flows vertically downward along the thickening portion 1340. For the first time, it can be formed in such a manner that the sphere is brought into contact with the low transmittance portion 1230. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the ball comes into contact with the low transmittance portion 1230 of the tubular member 1200 to generate a rotational force in the tubular member 1200.

A case where the tubular member 1200 becomes difficult to rotate for some reason will be described. As described above, in the tubular member 1200, the sliding end portion 1211 is rotatably fitted into the outer fitting groove 83a of the introduction cylinder 83. Therefore, when the frictional force between the sliding end portion 1211 and the outer fitting groove 83a exceeds the force in the rotational direction of the tubular member 1200 given from the sphere toward the low transmittance portion 1230 of the tubular member 1200, the tubular member 1200 has a tubular shape. The member 1200 is not rotated. Then, when the ball is further entered through the introduction cylinder 83, a situation occurs in which the ball is deposited along the guide member 1300. In this case, the ball that has flowed down the introduction cylinder 83 is not returned to the game area, which is not preferable for the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the guide member 1300 is formed of elastic rubber, when a sphere is deposited on the guide member 1300, the guide member 1300 is partially (thin-walled) due to the weight of the accumulated sphere. The guide member 1300 is separated from the facing inner peripheral surface of the tubular member 1200 by bending and deforming downward (lower part in FIG. 7) to the lower portion from the sliding portion 1320 formed in the tubular member 1200. The accumulated sphere can be dropped from the transmittance portion 1230 and the thickening portion 1340 of the guide member 1300, and the sphere can flow down. As a result, the ball can be returned to the game area, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the shape of the low transmittance portion 1230 of the tubular member 1200 and the path of light when light is incident on the low transmittance portion 1230 will be described. FIG. 9 is a partial cross-sectional view of the tubular member 1200 viewed in cross section in a plane passing through the axis of the tubular member 1200. In FIG. 9, only the cut surface portion is shown, and the paths of light applied to the tubular member 1200 are shown by arrows L1 and L2.

As shown in FIG. 9, the low transmittance portion 1230 includes an overhanging end portion 1231 formed with a constant distance from the outer peripheral surface of the tubular member 1200 (formed with a constant thickness) and an overhanging end portion 1231 thereof. On both sides (upper and lower sides of FIG. 9), the inner peripheral surface (left side of FIG. 9) of the tubular member 1200 and the overhanging end portion 1231 are connected, and a pair of recessed side surfaces formed in a concave shape on the tubular member 1200 side. It is formed with a portion 1232. That is, the low transmittance portion 1230 is formed in a cross-sectional shape in which both sides connecting the trapezoidal upper base and the lower base are recessed inward.

Since the peripheral surface portion 1240 and the overhanging end portion 1231 are formed with a constant thickness, the parallel light L1 is emitted from the inner peripheral side (left side of FIG. 9) of the tubular member 1200 to the peripheral surface portion 1240 and the low transmittance portion 1230 of the tubular member 1200. When passing through the overhanging end portion 1231, the light is not diffused, and the degree of brightness of the light is maintained on the outer peripheral side (right side of FIG. 9) of the tubular member 1200. On the other hand, when the parallel light L2 passes through the concave side surface portion 1232 of the tubular member 1200 from the inner peripheral side (left side of FIG. 9) of the tubular member 1200, the concave surface shape of the concave side surface portion 1232 causes the parallel light L2 to act. The light is diffused, and the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized on the outer peripheral side (right side of FIG. 9) of the tubular member 1200 is visually recognized in a weakened state as compared with the light traveling in the path of the parallel light L1. ..

As a result, light is irradiated from the direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member 1200, and when the tubular member 1200 is visually recognized from a position facing the light irradiation device 1400 with the tubular member 1200 sandwiched between them, the outer peripheral side of the tubular member 1200 Then, the degree of light brightness is maintained at the overhanging end portion 1231 and the peripheral surface portion 1240, and the degree of light brightness is weakened at the recessed side surface portions 1232 formed on both sides of the overhanging end portion 1231.

Therefore, the portion that is visually recognized by the low transmittance unit 1230 while maintaining the degree of brightness of the light emitted from the light source 1420 of the light irradiation device 1400 is the peripheral surface portion 1240 on both sides in the width direction of the low transmittance unit 1230. And the overhanging end portion 1231 of the low transmittance portion 1230 can be divided into three, and the light to be visually recognized can be subdivided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10, the appearance when light is irradiated from the back surface side of the tubular member 1200 toward the tubular member 1200 by the light irradiation device 1400 will be described. FIG. 10 is a front view of the light effect device 1000 in the assembled state. The decorative member 1500 is not shown, and the light visually recognized through the tubular member 1200 is shown in a band-shaped shaded pattern. In addition, the shade of the shaded pattern expresses the intensity of the brightness of the visually recognized light. That is, the darker the portion, the stronger the degree of brightness is visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 10, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 1400 toward the tubular member 1200 is the overhanging end portion 1231 and the peripheral surface portion 1240 of the low transmittance portion 1230 formed on the front side of the tubular member 1200. The degree of brightness of the light that is visually recognized through the passage is maintained strongly, and conversely, the light that is visually recognized through the recessed side surface portion 1232 is diffused and the degree of brightness of the light is increased. It is weakened. As a result, the light is visually recognized in a manner divided by the low transmittance unit 1230. Here, since the low transmittance portion 1230 is formed in a double helix shape on the inner peripheral surface of the tubular member 1200, the portion having a high degree of light brightness is relative to the axial center of the tubular member 1200. It is visually recognized as an inclined band.

Although the light is also divided by the low transmittance portion 1230 formed on the back surface side of the tubular member 1200, the directivity of the light emitted from the light source 1420 (see FIG. 6) of the light irradiation device 1400 is weak. Even if the light is divided by the low transmittance portion 1230 on the back side of the tubular member 1200, the light is combined with the light emitted from the plurality of light sources 1420 on the front side of the tubular member 1200. The boundary of the division is visually recognized in a mode that is difficult to distinguish. Therefore, the action of dividing the light is remarkably visually recognized in the portion on the front side of the tubular member 1200, and accordingly, the light has a band shape inclined with respect to the axis of the tubular member 1200. It is visually recognized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11, changes in the appearance of the tubular member 1200 caused by the rotation of the tubular member 1200 will be described. 11 (a) to 11 (c) are views for explaining the changes in appearance caused by the rotation of the tubular member 1200 in chronological order, and are front views of the light effect device 1000. 11 (b) shows a state in which the tubular member 1200 is rotated by a predetermined angle in the rotation direction R1 from the state shown in FIG. 11 (a), and FIG. 11 (c) shows FIG. 11 (b). The state in which the tubular member 1200 is rotated by a predetermined angle in the rotation direction R1 from the state shown in FIG. 11 (a) is shown, and the decorative member 1500 is omitted in FIGS. 11 (a) to 11 (c). ..

In FIG. 11, the light visually recognized through the tubular member 1200 is illustrated in a band-shaped shaded pattern. In addition, the shade of the shaded pattern expresses the intensity of the brightness of the visually recognized light. That is, the darker the portion, the stronger the degree of brightness is visually recognized.

As shown in FIGS. 11A to 11C, when the tubular member 1200 is rotated in the rotation direction R1, the pattern in the front view of the tubular member 1200 becomes the axial direction of the tubular member 1200 ( It is visually recognized in a mode of being moved to (lower part of FIG. 11).

More specifically, when paying attention to the representative portion S corresponding to a part of the low transmittance portion 1230, the representative portion S is actually moved in the rotation direction of the tubular member 1200 due to the rotation of the tubular member 1200. However, since the low transmittance portion 1230 is formed without interruption over the entire circumference of the tubular member 1200, it is easy for the player to misunderstand that the representative portion S is moved downward. That is, it is not possible to determine whether the representative portion S has been moved in the axial direction X of the tubular member 1200 or in the axial direction Y.

Therefore, although the tubular member 1200 actually rotates about the axis and the low transmittance portion 1230 is moved in the direction X perpendicular to the axis, the low transmittance portion 1230 moves in the axial direction Y of the tubular member 1200. It is visually recognized as if it was done. That is, in FIG. 11B, the representative portion S moves from the position Y0 to the position Y1 along the axial direction Y by rotating the tubular member 1200 in the rotation direction R1 from the state of FIG. 11A. In FIG. 11 (c), the tubular member 1200 is rotated in the rotation direction R1 from the state of FIG. 11 (b), so that the representative portion S is positioned along the axial direction Y. It is easy to be misunderstood as if it was moved from Y1 to position Y2.

As a result, the pattern of light visually recognized through the tubular member 1200 in the front view is translated in the axial direction of the tubular member 1200 without controlling the light source 1420 (see FIG. 6) of the light irradiation device 1400. be able to.

For example, when the position of the light visually recognized through the tubular member 1200 is moved in parallel by changing the light output direction of the light source 1420 (see FIG. 6) of the light irradiation device 1400, the moving distance of the light becomes long. , The swing angle that changes the light output direction of the light source 1420 becomes large. Further, as the distance between the light source 1420 and the tubular member 1200 becomes shorter, the swing angle for changing the light output direction of the light source 1420 becomes larger.

Therefore, in order to shorten the distance between the tubular member 1200 and the light source 1420 while keeping the moving distance of the light emitted from the light source 1420 (see FIG. 6) long, it is necessary to increase the swing angle of the light source 1420. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the light source 1420 is reduced. On the other hand, when the distance between the tubular member 1200 and the light source 1420 is increased, the swing angle of the light source 1420 can be suppressed to some extent, but the arrangement space of the light effect device 1000 becomes large, and other accessories The placement space is reduced. Therefore, it is difficult to greatly move the light emitted from the light source 1420 while securing the arrangement space for other accessories.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the movement of the light emitted from the light source 1420 (see FIG. 6) to the tubular member 1200 is caused by the rotation of the tubular member 1200, so that the tubular member 1200 and the light source 1420 It is possible to keep the moving distance of the light emitted from the light source 1420 long while shortening the distance to and from. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large moving distance of the light visually recognized through the tubular member 1200 while securing the arrangement space for other accessories.

It will be described back to FIG. When the guide member 1300 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member 1200, the light emitted from the light source 1420 (see FIG. 6) of the light irradiation device 1400 is shielded by the guide member 1300, and is tubular in front view. The degree of brightness of the light visually recognized on the peripheral surface of the member 1200 may be weakened. However, in the present embodiment, the guide member 1300 is arranged so as to be moved to the left in the front view from the axial center of the tubular member 1200. That is, since the guide member 1300 is arranged at a position separated from the output direction of the light emitted from the light source 1420 of the light irradiation device 1400, the influence of weakening the degree of light brightness can be limited. it can.

Further, since the guide member 1300 is formed of a colorless and light-transmitting elastic material such as silicon rubber, the light emitted from the light source 1420 (see FIG. 6) of the light irradiation device 1400 is shielded by the guide member 1300. As a result, the degree to which the degree of brightness of light is weakened can be reduced.

It will be described back to FIG. In the light effect device 1000, the decorative member 1500 is arranged on the most front side, and the decorative member 1500 is formed so as to shield the tubular member 1200 in front view. As described above, since the decorative member 1500 is formed of a resin material and has a portion through which light is transmitted, the light visually recognized on the front side of the tubular member 1200 can be visually recognized via the decorative member 1500. Is formed in.

Next, the decorative member 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. 12 (a) is a front view of the decorative member 1500, FIG. 12 (b) is a rear view of the decorative member 1500, and FIG. 12 (c) is a view in the direction of arrow XIIC of FIG. 12 (a). It is a side view of the decorative member 1500, FIG. 12 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the decorative member 1500 in the XIId-XIid line of FIG. 12 (a), and FIG. 12 (e) is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG. 12 (a). It is a partial side view of the decorative member 1500 in the direction view of arrow XIIe. For ease of understanding, in FIG. 12D, only the cross-sectional portion is partially illustrated, and the other portions are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 12, the decorative member 1500 is separated from the main body portion 1510 formed in a rectangular plate shape and the back side of the main body portion 1510, extends parallel to the main body portion 1510, and is attached to the game board 13. It includes a pair of plate-shaped fastening portions 1520 having fastening holes to be fastened, and a rectangular plate-shaped connecting portion 1530 extending from the main body portion 1510 to the fastening portion 1520.

The main body portion 1510 projects in a band shape on the back side, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 5), a plurality of rows of low transmittance are formed in a wavy shape along a direction inclined along the axis of the tubular member 1200 (see FIG. 5). It is provided with a rate portion 1511 and a straight strip-shaped portion 1512 formed on the front side so as to intersect with the low transmittance portion 1511.

As shown in FIG. 12D, the low transmittance portion 1511 is formed so that both side surfaces in the width direction are recessed toward the decorative member 1500. Therefore, the light is diffused by the same action as the recessed side surface portion 1232 of the low transmittance portion 1230 of the tubular member 1200 described above, and the degree of brightness of the visually recognized light is weakened. Further, the cross-sectional shape of the decorative member 1500 is formed into a concave shape between the adjacent low transmittance portions 1511 (see FIG. 12D).

Here, for example, when light is applied to the entire width direction of the decorative member 1500 from the back side of the decorative member 1500 and the light is moved in the vertical direction (FIG. 12 (a) vertical direction), the decorative member 1500 is used. When the light is visually recognized through the decorative member 1500 from the front side of the above, it is visually recognized as if the light is moved along the low transmittance portion 1511 between the adjacent low transmittance portions 1511.

That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 5), in the state where the decorative member 1500 is not present, as described above, the tubular member 1200 is rotated so that the light is moved in the axial direction of the tubular member 1200. Although it is visually recognized, when the movement of the light is visually recognized through the decorative member 1500, it is visually recognized that the light is moved along the low transmittance portion 1511 of the decorative member 1500. Therefore, the light can be visually recognized as moving along a wave shape inclined in the axial direction of the tubular member 1200, and the effect of light can be complicated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the action of the decorative member 1500 to divide light will be described. FIG. 13 is a front view of the light effect device 1000. A partially enlarged front view of the light effect device 1000 is also shown. In FIG. 13, the pattern of light visually recognized through the tubular member 1200 is illustrated as a band-shaped shaded pattern. In addition, the intensity of the degree of brightness of the visually recognized light is expressed by the shade of the band-shaped shaded pattern that illustrates the light.

As shown in FIG. 13, the light is divided at the low transmittance portion 1511 of the decorative member 1500 as a boundary. That is, since the decorative member 1500 is formed with a concave cross-sectional shape between the adjacent low transmittance portions 1511, the light visually recognized through the adjacent low transmittance portions 1511 is affected by the concave surface shape. It is visually recognized in a mode of being reduced in the direction connecting the adjacent low transmittance portions 1511 (the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the low transmittance portion 1511). Therefore, the light is divided by the low transmittance unit 1511. Therefore, the outer shape of the light can be further subdivided as compared with the case where the light is visually recognized through the tubular member 1200.

It will be described back to FIG. As shown in FIG. 12 (e), the strip-shaped portion 1512 is formed so that both side surfaces in the width direction are recessed toward the decorative member 1500 side, and the low transmittance portion 1511 of the tubular member 1200 is extended in front view. Since it is formed in a manner that intersects the direction, when the light is moved along the low transmittance portion 1511 of the decorative member 1500 by the rotation of the tubular member 1200, the light traverses the strip portion 1512. At that time, the outer shape of the light is changed by the action of the shape of the band-shaped portion 1512.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, a path when light passes through the strip 1512 will be described. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the path of light.

As shown in FIG. 14, the plate T1 extending in the vertical direction of the paper surface and formed of a light-transmitting resin material has a cross-sectional shape similar to that of the strip-shaped portion 1512 and is extended in the vertical direction of the paper surface. It has a part T2. When the light sources L10 and L11 that irradiate light from the back side of the plate T1 (right side of FIG. 14) are visually recognized from the front side of the plate T1 (left side of FIG. 14), the light does not pass through the band-shaped portion T2 (light from the light source L10). The light travels straight, but when the light passes through a concave portion formed on the side surface of the band-shaped portion T2 (light from the light source L11), the light is refracted by the action of the concave shape. Then, the light incidented by the light source L11 is visually recognized as if it was incident from the virtual light source L12, and as a result, the outer shape of the light is visually recognized as being shrunk. Here, when the light source is moved from the position of the light source L10 to the position of the light source L11, the outer shape of the light is visually recognized in such a manner that it is shrunk as the light moves.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the change in the outer shape of the light that traverses the strip 1512 will be described. 15 (a) to 15 (c) are views for explaining in chronological order the changes in the appearance of the decorative member 1500 caused by the movement of the light visually recognized through the decorative member 1500 in the vertical direction. It is a partially enlarged front view of 1000.

In order to facilitate understanding, only the light pattern visually recognized through the peripheral surface portion 1240 sandwiched between the pair of low transmittance portions 1230 adjacent to each other in the front view is illustrated by a shaded pattern, and the light of the other portion is illustrated. 15 (b) shows a state in which light is moved downward from the state shown in FIG. 15 (a), and FIG. 15 (c) is shown in FIG. 15 (b). The state in which the light is moved downward from the state in which the light is moved is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 15A, the pattern of light visually recognized in a mode of being moved along the low transmittance portion 1511 is irrespective of the left and right positions of the decorative member 1500 before approaching the strip-shaped portion 1512. It is visually recognized with a uniform width (a width equivalent to the interval between adjacent low transmittance portions 1230). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15B, when the pattern of light approaches the band-shaped portion 1512, the light near the band-shaped portion 1512 is contracted in the width direction of the band-shaped portion 1512 (attracted to the band-shaped portion 1512 and cut off). The light flowing along the arrow S1) is visually recognized.

When the light is moved further downward from the state of FIG. 15 (b), as shown in FIG. 15 (c), the light ends crossing the band-shaped portion 1512 on the left side of the decorative member 1500 and is visually recognized. On the right side of the decorative member 1500, the light near the strip 1512 is contracted in the width direction of the strip 1512 (attracted to the strip 1512 and cut, arrow S2). Light flowing along). Therefore, in the process of moving the light along the low transmittance portion 1511 of the decorative member 1500, the pattern of the light visually recognized is changed in order at the left and right positions of the strip-shaped portion 1512.

Therefore, the pattern of the moving light can be visually recognized by the player in a manner changed during the movement. Further, since the change of the light pattern can be performed at an arbitrary portion of the decorative member 1500 according to the arrangement position of the strip-shaped portion 1512, the effect of the light effect device can be improved.

Next, a change in the appearance of the light effect device 1000 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (a) and 16 (b) are front views of the light effect device 1000. Note that FIG. 16B shows a state in which the tubular member 1200 is rotated by a predetermined angle from the state shown in FIG. 16A.

As described above, the tubular member 1200 is rotated by the force generated by the flow of the sphere, and at that time, the sphere is flowed down on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member 1200. Therefore, the light is shielded by the sphere, and the shadow Sh of the sphere can be visually recognized in the front view. The shadow Sh of the sphere is moved in the axial direction of the tubular member 1200 (the shadow Sh of the sphere is moved from the state of FIG. 16A to the state of FIG. 16B), so that the light is emitted. Is moved in the axial direction of the tubular member 1200, so that the effect of being visually recognized by the player can be improved.

Further, the intensity of the brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member 1200 in the front view is adjusted by controlling the intensity of the brightness of the light emitted from the light source 1420 of the light irradiation device 1400. However, in the present embodiment, the shadow Sh of the flowing sphere is used to form the light that is visually recognized to have different strengths. Therefore, since it is not necessary to control the switching of the degree of brightness of the light emitted from the light source 1420 of the light irradiation device 1400, the control cost of the light irradiation device 1400 can be suppressed.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 27. In the light effect device 1000 of the first embodiment, the case where the tubular member 1200 is rotated by the sphere flowing down the inner peripheral side of the tubular member 1200 has been described, but in the light effect device 2000 of the second embodiment, A case where the tubular member 2200 is rotated by the ball flowing down the outer peripheral side of the tubular member 2200 will be described. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The overall configuration of the light effect device 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a front perspective view of the light effect device 2000. Note that FIG. 17 shows a state in which the decorative member 2500 has been removed.

As shown in FIG. 17, the light effect device 2000 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the tubular member 2200 rotatably fitted to the introduction cylinder 83 and the tubular member 2200, and the spheres are arranged in a predetermined path. The guide member 2300 to be flowed down, the light irradiation device 2400 that is swingably arranged around the introduction cylinder 83 and irradiates light toward the tubular member 2200, and the light irradiation device 2400 that is arranged on the front side of the tubular member 2200. It also includes a decorative member 2500, which is arranged so as to be in contact with the guide member 2300 and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material.

On the upper side of the arrangement position of the light effect device 2000, the first flow down hole 2084 and the second flow down hole 2085 are bored in the outer wall portion 82 with an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The first flow down hole 2084 is formed on the left side of the introduction cylinder 83 when viewed from the front, and the guide member 2300 is fixed to the lower side of the first flow down hole 2084 so as to hang below the outer wall portion 82.

The guide member 2300 is a member that serves as a rail for allowing a ball flowing down through the first flow down hole 2084 to flow down in a predetermined path, and is made of a resin material having sufficient rigidity, and one end thereof is an outer wall. It is fixed to the lower end of the portion 82, and the other end, which is the opposite end of the one end, is extended toward the tubular member 2200, and the tubular member 2200 is in the assembled state (see FIG. 17). A sliding portion 2320 formed so as to be close to the side surface of the main body portion 2220, a fall guide portion 2330 extending vertically downward from the extending end of the sliding portion 2320, and a ball of the fall guide portion 2330. A thickened portion 2340 formed by thickening the flow-down side (right side in FIG. 17), and a guide-like extension from the front side and the back side side surface of the sliding portion 2320 and the back side side surface of the fall guide portion 2330. A ball having a guide portion 2350 and flowing down the first flow down hole 2084 is caused to flow down along the guide member 2300 and is brought into contact with the low transmittance portion 2230 of the tubular member 2200.

In the sliding portion 2320, the fall guide portion 2330, and the thickening portion 2340, the side surface (right side in FIG. 17) on the side where the ball flows down is formed on the flat plate. Therefore, in relation to the guide member 2300, the sphere can move vertically downward and to the front side during the flow. On the other hand, as will be described later, since the decorative member 2500 is arranged on the front side and the movement of the ball to the front side is restricted, the flow path of the ball is restricted vertically downward.

The second flow down hole 2085 is formed on the right side of the introduction cylinder 83 when viewed from the front, and is formed directly above the collision portion 2414 of the light irradiation device 2400. The ball flowing down through the second flow-down hole 2085 collides with the collided portion 2414, and the base portion 2410 of the light irradiation device 2400 is swung by the collision force generated at that time. Details will be described later.

In the tubular member 2200, a peripheral surface portion 2240 is formed between the low transmittance portions 2230 formed in a spiral shape on the outer peripheral surface thereof. Since the technical features of the cross-sectional shape of the low transmittance portion 2230 and the cross-sectional shape of the low transmittance portion 1230 in the first embodiment are common, the description thereof will be omitted.

The peripheral surface portion 2240 is formed so that the cross-sectional shape in a plane passing through the axial center is a concave surface shape recessed inside the tubular member 2200. Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the refraction action of light due to the shape of the peripheral surface portion 2240 will be described.

FIG. 18 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the tubular member 2200 viewed in cross section in a plane passing through the axis. The outer peripheral side of the tubular member 2200 is shown as the left side of FIG. 18, the inner peripheral side is shown as the right side of FIG. 18, and only the cut surface portion is shown.

Since the cross-sectional shape of the peripheral surface portion 2240 in the plane passing through the axial center is formed as a concave surface shape recessed inside the tubular member 2200, the light passing through the center of the peripheral surface portion 2240 travels straight from the center of the peripheral surface portion. Light is refracted as it passes farther away. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, the light emitted from the light source L21 arranged on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member 2200 toward the outer peripheral side of the tubular member 2200 is visible from the outer peripheral side of the tubular member 2200. Then, it is visually recognized as being irradiated from the virtual light source L22.

That is, for the player who visually recognizes the light emitted from the light irradiation device 2400 (see FIG. 17) through the tubular member 2200 on the front side of the tubular member 2200, the light is on the central side of the peripheral surface portion 2240 of the tubular member 2200. It is visually recognized in an aspect (a mode in which light is shrunk and separated from the low transmittance unit 2230) that is brought to (a set of midpoints of lines connecting adjacent low transmittance units 2230). Therefore, the action of light being divided by the low transmittance portion 2230 of the tubular member 2200 can be made more remarkable.

The above-mentioned action of refraction of light occurs regardless of whether the concave curved surface is formed on the light source L21 side or the opposite side of the light source L21, and the concave curved surface is formed on the peripheral surface portion 2240. It occurs even if it is formed on both the inner and outer sides of the. Therefore, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 2400 (see FIG. 17) arranged on the back surface side of the tubular member 2200 passes through the peripheral surface portion 2240 formed on the back surface side portion of the tubular member 2200. It is refracted once and then refracted again by passing through the peripheral surface portion 2240 formed on the front side portion of the tubular member 2200. Next, with reference to FIG. 19, a pattern of light visually recognized through the first half-cylinder portion 2201 which is a portion on the back surface side of the tubular member 2200 will be described.

FIG. 19A is a front view of the tubular member 2200 and the light irradiation device 2400, and FIG. 19B is a side view of the tubular member 2200 and the light irradiation device 2400. Note that FIGS. 19A and 19B show a state in which the first half-cylinder member 2201 having a shape obtained by dividing the tubular member 2200 in half by a plane including the axis is arranged on the back surface side. The second half-cylinder member 2202, which forms a pair with the first half-cylinder member 2201 and is arranged on the front side, is shown by a broken line. Further, FIG. 19A illustrates a pattern of light when the light emitted from the light source 1420 of the light irradiation device 2400 is visually recognized through the first half-cylinder member 2201 of the tubular member 2200, and FIG. 19B is shown. ), The path of the light emitted from the light source 1420 of the light irradiation device 2400 is illustrated by an arrow.

As shown in FIG. 19B, light with weak directivity is emitted from the light source 1420 of the light irradiation device 2400, and the tubular member 2200 is irradiated with light over a wide range in the width direction from the back surface side. Further, the irradiated light is visually recognized in such a manner that the degree of brightness is the strongest near the axis of the tubular member 2200 in the front view, and the degree of brightness is weakened as the distance from the axis of the tubular member 2200 is reduced. To.

As described above, the light visually recognized on the peripheral surface portion 2240 of the tubular member 2200 is visually recognized in a manner of being brought toward the center side of the peripheral surface portion 2240 by the action of the concave surface shape of the peripheral surface portion 2240. Therefore, since the light pattern to be visually recognized is kept away from the low transmittance unit 2230, the boundary of the light divided by the low transmittance unit 2230 can be more clearly discriminated.

Here, the curvature of the concave shape can be freely selected. For example, by forming the curvature of the concave surface to be small, the pattern of light visually recognized on the peripheral surface portion 2240 of the tubular member 2200 can be made narrower. Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the pattern of light visually recognized through the tubular member 2200 will be described.

FIG. 20A is a front view of the tubular member 2200 and the light irradiation device 2400, and FIG. 20B is a side view of the tubular member 2200 and the light irradiation device 2400. FIG. 20 (a) shows a pattern of light when the light emitted from the light source 1420 of the light irradiation device 2400 is visually recognized through the tubular member 2200, and FIG. 20 (b) shows the light source of the light irradiation device 2400. The path of the light emitted from 1420 is illustrated by an arrow.

As described above, the peripheral surface portion 2240 of the tubular member 2200 is visually recognized in a manner of being brought closer to the center side of the peripheral surface portion 2240 due to the action of the concave surface shape. Further, the concave-shaped action described above occurs in the first half-cylinder member 2201 which is the back side portion of the tubular member 2200 and the second half-cylinder member 2202 which is the front side portion. Therefore, the light divided into the narrow outer shape by the first half-cylinder member 2201 is further divided by the second half-cylinder member 2202 in a mode in which the narrow width direction of the light is divided.

That is, in the front view, the pattern of the light emitted from the light source 1420 of the light irradiation device 2400 visually recognized through the tubular member 2200 is reduced to the area surrounded on all sides by the low transmittance portion 2230 and visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize that a plurality of lights separated from each other are formed on the peripheral surface of the tubular member 2200. As a result, the number of lights visually recognized through the tubular member 2200 can be increased while suppressing the number of light sources 1420 arranged in the light irradiation device 2400.

Further, for example, when the shape of the light source 1420 of the light irradiation device 2400 is formed in a star shape, the outer shape of the light formed in each region surrounded on all sides by the low transmittance portion 2230 is formed in a star shape. Therefore, the number of lights visually recognized through the tubular member 2200 can be increased without impairing the device of the shape of the light source.

Here, the curvature of the concave surface of the peripheral surface portion 2240 can be freely selected. By forming the curvature of the concave surface portion 2240 to be small, the light pattern visually recognized in the region surrounded on all sides by the low transmittance portion 2230 in the front view can be made smaller in diameter. In this case, the divided lights can be easily discriminated as separate ones, and the effect of increasing the number of lights can be improved.

Next, the swing of the light irradiation device 2400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. First, the shape of the light irradiation device 2400 will be described with reference to FIG.

21 (a) is a top view of the light irradiation device 2400, FIG. 21 (b) is a front view of the light irradiation device 2400, and FIG. 21 (c) is a side view of the light irradiation device 2400. ..

As shown in FIG. 21, the light irradiation device 2400 is a device that irradiates the tubular member 2200 (see FIG. 17) and the decorative member 2500 (see FIG. 17) with light from the back surface side, and is externally fitted and fixed to the introduction cylinder 83. A base portion 2410 to be formed and a plurality of light sources 1420 fixed to the front side of the base portion 2410 are provided. In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the light source 1420 moves up and down on the central axis of the base portion 2410, that is, on the axis of the tubular member 2200 in the front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 17). Four are arranged at equal intervals.

The base portion 2410 has a fitting portion 2411 having a recessed portion outerly fitted and fixed to the introduction cylinder 83 at one end thereof, and the fitting portion 2411 having a central axis of the introduction cylinder 83 in an assembled state (see FIG. 17). It has an elongated hole shape bent along a central circle, and is vertical from the sliding hole 2412 to be drilled and the other end, which is the opposite end of the fitting portion 2411 to be formed. It is a plate-shaped portion formed by extending downward and projecting a rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 2413 in which a light source 1420 is arranged on the front side and one end portion of the fitting portion 2411. The back side is provided with a collided portion 2414 formed in a lowered manner.

The collided portion 2414 is a portion formed vertically below the flow-down hole 2285 in the assembled state (see FIG. 17), and the collided portion 2414 is irradiated with light by colliding with a ball flowing down the flow-down hole 2285. The device 2400 is swung around the introduction cylinder 83. Since the collided portion 2414 is formed so as to be lowered toward the back surface side, the light irradiation device 2400 is viewed clockwise (see FIG. 21 (a)) when the sphere collides with the collided portion 2410. Is swayed to.

In the present embodiment, the sliding shaft P21 (see FIG. 22) fixed to the back surface side of the game board 13 slides on the inner peripheral side of the sliding hole 2412 in the swinging direction of the light irradiation device 2400. Even if a large load is applied, the sliding shaft P21 and the end of the sliding hole 2412 are in contact with each other, and the swing angle of the light irradiation device 2400 is regulated. Further, even if the light irradiation device 2400 is shaken, it is returned to the initial position by the urging force R21 (see FIG. 22) of a torsion spring (not shown).

Therefore, normally, the light output direction is directed to the vicinity of the axis of the tubular member 2200, and the light irradiation device 2400 is swung only when the sphere collides with the collided portion 2414 to change the light output direction. It is possible to perform the effect of changing. Next, with reference to FIG. 22, a change in the pattern of light visually recognized through the tubular member 2200 in the front view due to the swing of the light irradiation device 2400 will be described.

22 (a) and 22 (b) are top views of the tubular member 2200 and the light irradiation device 2400, and FIGS. 22 (c) and 22 (d) are the tubular member 2200 and the light irradiation device 2400. It is a front view of. Note that FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (c) show a state in which the light irradiation device 2400 is arranged at an initial position, and FIGS. 22 (b) and 22 (d) show that the light irradiation device 2400 is shaken. The moved state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 22A, in the initial position, the urging force R21 acts on the light irradiation device 2400, and the right end of the sliding hole 2412 of the light irradiation device 2400 is in contact with the sliding shaft P21. The posture of the light irradiation device 2400 is maintained. In this case, in front view, the degree of brightness of the emitted light becomes the strongest in the vicinity of the axis of the tubular member 2200, and the degree of brightness decreases as the distance from the axis increases.

From the state of FIG. 22A, when a sphere that has passed through the second flow down hole 2085 (see FIG. 17) collides with the collided portion 2414, a rotational force F21 is applied to the light irradiation device 2400, and the light irradiation device 2400 Is swung clockwise in the top view (see FIG. 22B). In this case, the light visually recognized in the front view has the strongest degree of brightness at a position deviated to the left by a predetermined distance from the axis of the tubular member 2200. That is, the light irradiation device 2400 is swung so that the light output direction is moved to the left.

Further, since the urging force R21 is applied to the light irradiation device 2400, the light irradiation device 2400 is returned to the initial position again. Along with this, the light output direction is visually recognized so as to be moved to the right in the front view. Therefore, when the sphere collides with the collided portion 2414 of the light irradiation device 2400, the position where the degree of light brightness is strongly formed is visually recognized in a mode of reciprocating in the left-right direction.

Here, as a method of changing the light output direction of the light irradiation device 2400, it is conceivable to change the light output direction of the light source 1420 by controlling it with a drive motor or the like. In that case, the material cost of the drive source is changed. Also, a control cost for controlling the drive source is required.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, each time the ball collides with the collided portion 2414, the output direction of the light in the front view is reciprocated in the left-right direction, so that the drive motor is produced while the light vibrates left and right. Etc. can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of producing light and suppress the material cost and control cost required for the drive source.

Further, as described above in the first embodiment, the degree of brightness of light visually recognized on the peripheral surface of the tubular member 2200 by rotating the tubular member 2200 (cylindrical member 1200, see FIG. 11). The pattern formed by the difference between the above is visually recognized as being moved in the axial direction. On the other hand, when the light irradiation device 2400 is oscillated, the light output direction is visually oscillated in the left-right direction. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect in which the light moves up, down, left and right, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Even in the mode of moving the light up, down, left and right, the driving force for moving the light is only the kinetic energy of the flowing sphere, so that the effect of producing the light is improved and the material cost and control cost required for the driving source are improved. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 to 26, a mechanism for branching the flow path of the sphere that has passed through the first flow hole 2084 will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 23, the formation pattern of the low transmittance portion 2230 of the tubular member 2200 will be described.

FIG. 23 is a developed view of the tubular member 2200. The outer peripheral side of the tubular member 2200 is shown on the front side, and the shape of the low transmittance portion 2230 is shown in a simplified form for easy understanding.

As shown in FIG. 23, the low transmittance portion 2230 is formed in a double helix shape and has a portion divided by a width larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the vicinity of the lower end of the tubular member 2200 and the first spiral portion 2230a. A second spiral portion 2230b whose inclination angle is changed by The first spiral portion 2230a and the second spiral portion 2230b extend from the upper end portion to the lower end portion of the tubular member 2200, respectively.

Here, the inclination angle of the low transmittance portion 2230 means, for example, the angle formed by the axial center of the tubular member 2200 and the low transmittance portion 2230 in a front view.

The first spiral portion 2230a has a dividing portion in which the protrusion of the tubular member 2200 from the peripheral surface is partially suppressed, and the second spiral portion 2230b is a bent portion serving as a starting point at which the inclination angle is changed. It has 2233.

Here, the divided portion is positioned at a position (height at which the branch groove 2531 starts to be formed) corresponding to the height at which the branch groove 2531 (see FIG. 24) of the decorative member 2500 is formed in the assembled state (see FIG. 17). It is formed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the shape of the decorative member 2500, which is arranged in such a manner that the back surface is in contact with the guide member 2300 in the assembled state (see FIG. 17) and has a role of guiding the flowing ball, will be described. To do. 24 (a) is a front view of the decorative member 2500, FIG. 24 (b) is a rear view of the decorative member 2500, and FIG. 24 (c) is a top view of the decorative member 2500. In FIG. 24C, the outer shape of the tubular member 2200 in the assembled state (see FIG. 17) is shown by a broken line.

As shown in FIG. 24, the decorative member 2500 is a member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a main body portion 2510 formed in a rectangular plate shape and a main body portion 2510 on the back surface side of the main body portion 2510. A plate-shaped fastening portion 2520 having a fastening hole that is formed in parallel with the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) and is extended from the main body portion 2510 to the fastening portion 2520 and is in an assembled state (see FIG. 25). ), The tubular member 2200 and the connecting portion 2530 having a concentric curved surface formed on the back surface side are provided.

The main body portion 2510 is formed so as to project in a band shape on the back surface side, and is formed in a wavy shape in a plurality of rows along a direction inclined with respect to the axial direction of the tubular member 2200 in the assembled state (see FIG. 25). A plurality of pieces formed so as to project to the front side in a mode of intersecting the transmittance portion 2511 and the low transmittance portion 2511 (that is, a mode of intersecting the extending direction of the low transmittance portion 2511 in the front view in the assembled state). A band-shaped portion 2512 is provided. Since the technical idea of the cross-sectional shape of the low transmittance portion 2511 and the strip-shaped portion 2512 is the same as the technical idea of the cross-sectional shape of the low transmittance portion 1511 and the strip-shaped portion 1512 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 24 (a), the strip-shaped portion 2512 has two streaks formed vertically (up and down position in FIG. 24 (a)) on the front side of the decorative member 2500, and has a low transmittance portion 2511 in front view. At each intersection, the overhanging portion and the flattened portion are alternately formed. Further, in the region sandwiched between the pair of adjacent low transmittance portions 2511, when the strip-shaped portion 2512 of one of the two strip-shaped portions 2512 overhangs, the other on the opposite side of the strip-shaped portion 2512. The strip 2512 of the muscle is formed in a flattened manner. Therefore, as will be described later, the change in the pattern of the moving light (see FIG. 27) visually recognized through the decorative member 2500 can be complicated.

As shown in FIG. 24 (c), the connecting portion 2530 of the decorative member 2500 is formed in a groove shape bent on the back surface and a branch groove 2531 formed in a shape in which a sphere is guided and can flow down (FIG. 24 (FIG. 24). b) has).

The branch groove 2531 is a groove that is inclined downward from the back surface portion of the connecting portion 2530 of the decorative member 2500 toward the main body portion 2510, bent at a predetermined position, extends vertically downward, and extends to the lower end of the decorative member 2500. It is formed into a shape (see FIG. 24 (b)). Here, the position in the height direction (position in the vertical direction in FIG. 24B) where the branch groove 2531 starts to be formed from the back surface side of the connecting portion 2530 is the position of the tubular member 2200 in the assembled state (see FIG. 25). Since the divided portion of the spiral portion 2230a is formed in a manner corresponding to the position in the height direction in which the divided portion is formed, the path through which the sphere flows can be branched, as will be described later.

The depth dimension and the width dimension of the branch groove 2531 are formed so as to allow a ball that comes into contact with the peripheral surface portion 2240 of the tubular member 2200 and flows down in the assembled state (see FIG. 25). In the present embodiment, the width dimension of the branch groove 2531 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the depth dimension of the branch groove 2531 is in contact with the peripheral surface portion 2240 of the tubular member 2200 in the assembled state. When the ball flows down, it is formed in a size with a slight gap. Therefore, the sphere is formed so as to flow down along the branch groove 2531 of the decorative member 2500.

The back surface portion of the connecting portion 2530 formed on the side surface side (right side in FIG. 24 (b)) of the formation depth of the branch groove 2531 is the front surface of the drop guide portion 2330 of the guide member 2300 in the assembled state (see FIG. 25). It is formed so that it can come into contact with the side surface. Along with this, the back surface portion of the connecting portion 2530 formed on the center side (left side of FIG. 24 (b)) of the formation depth of the branch groove 2531 is arranged to face the guide portion 2350 of the guide member 2300 in the assembled state. It functions as a guide on the front side when the ball flows down along the guide member 2300.

That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 25), the ball flowing down the first flow-down hole 2084 is the drop guide portion 2330 (or thickening portion 2340) of the guide member 2300, the guide portion 2350, and the peripheral surface portion 2240 of the tubular member 2200. And flow down in a path formed by the back side of the connecting portion 2530 of the decorative member 2500.

Here, a mode in which the sphere flows down along the guide member 2300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. First, with reference to FIG. 25, a case where the sphere abuts on the first spiral portion 2230a and flows down at the start of contact between the sphere and the low transmittance portion 2230 of the tubular member 2200 will be described.

FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining the process of the sphere flowing down along the guide member 2300 in chronological order, and FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c) show the tubular member 2200, the guide member 2300, and the guide member 2300 in the assembled state. It is a front view of the decorative member 2500. It should be noted that the illustration of the light irradiation device 2400 is omitted, the portion of the tubular member 2200 shielded by the decorative member 2500 is shown by a broken line, and the branch groove 2531 of the decorative member 2500 is shown by a broken line. For the sake of simplicity, the low transmittance portion 2511 and the strip-shaped portion 2512 are omitted. Note that FIG. 25 (b) shows a state in which the sphere has flowed down a predetermined distance from the state shown in FIG. 25 (a), and FIG. 25 (c) shows the sphere from the state shown in FIG. 25 (b). Is shown in the state where it has flowed down a predetermined distance.

As shown in FIG. 25A, the sphere comes into contact with the first spiral portion 2230a of the tubular member 2200 and flows down. Here, the sphere is prevented from moving in the horizontal direction by the drop guide portion 2330 of the guide member 2300, the guide portion 2350, the peripheral surface portion 2240 of the tubular member 2200, and the side surface on the back side of the connecting portion 2530 of the decorative member 2500. , The sphere is flowed vertically downward, and the low transmittance portion 2230 of the tubular member 2200 is pushed by the weight of the sphere, so that the tubular member 2200 is rotated. By rotating the tubular member 2200, the contact position between the sphere and the low transmittance portion 2230 is moved downward, and the sphere is caused to flow downward accordingly.

When the sphere flows down, the tubular member 2200 is rotated, and the low transmission rate portion 2230 formed spirally on the peripheral surface of the tubular member 2200 is rotated. Therefore, as described above in the first embodiment. The light visually recognized through the rotated tubular member 2200 is visually recognized in a mode of being moved in the axial direction of the tubular member 2200, but since it is the same technical concept as the technical concept described in the first embodiment, The explanation is omitted.

When the sphere flows down to the position shown in FIG. 25 (b), the divided portion of the first spiral portion 2230a is arranged below the sphere. That is, the low transmittance portion 2230 that supported the sphere from below is no longer formed under the sphere, and the resistance when the sphere flows vertically downward is minimized. Then, the sphere flows vertically downward and abuts on the second spiral portion 2230b. Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), the sphere flows down the tubular member 2200 through the portion (the portion below the bent portion 2233) where the inclination angle of the low transmittance portion 2230 changes slightly. That is, in the process of the ball flowing down, the position where the ball flows down is always to the left of the front view of the tubular member 2200.

Focusing on the rotation speed of the tubular member 2200, from FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (b), the sphere flows down at a substantially constant speed, and the rotation speed of the tubular member 2200 is also about constant accordingly. However, in FIG. 25 (b), since the sphere freely falls, the force due to the weight of the sphere acting on the tubular member 2200 disappears, and the rotation speed of the tubular member 2200 becomes FIG. 25 (a). ) Is smaller than the state.

Further, in FIG. 25 (c), among the low transmittance portions 2230 abutting on the sphere, the inclination angle below the bent portion 2233 is formed smaller than in the case of FIG. 25 (a). Therefore, the rotation angle at which the tubular member 2200 is rotated when the sphere flows down a predetermined distance from the state of FIG. 25 (a) is the tubular member 2200 when the sphere flows down a predetermined distance from the state of FIG. 25 (c). Is greater than the rotation angle at which is rotated.

For example, if the spheres flow down at the same speed, the spheres flow down a predetermined distance from the state shown in FIG. 25 (c) as compared to the case where the spheres flow down a predetermined distance from the state shown in FIG. The rotation angle of the shape member 2200 becomes smaller. Therefore, the rotation speed of the tubular member 2200 can be changed even when the flow speed of the sphere is unlikely to fluctuate.

Therefore, in the process in which the sphere flows down along the path shown in FIG. 25, the rotational speed of the tubular member 2200 is variably formed. Therefore, the effect of rotating the tubular member 2200 to move the light in the axial direction of the tubular member 2200 can be complicated, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), the portion where the inclination angle of the low transmittance portion 2230 is small is formed only in the lower end portion (the portion below the bent portion 2233) of the tubular member 2200, and the low transmittance portion 2230 is formed. The sphere is discharged below the tubular member 2200 in a state of being in contact with a portion having a small inclination angle. Therefore, if the player remembers the rotation speed of the tubular member 2200 when the ball flows down in contact with the portion where the inclination angle of the low transmittance portion 2230 is small, the rotation speed of the tubular member 2200 can be confirmed. This makes it possible to confirm the timing at which the ball is discharged from the lower end of the tubular member 2200. Therefore, the flow position of the sphere can be confirmed by confirming the mode of the change in appearance visually recognized through the tubular member 2200 without paying attention to the sphere (or the shadow Sh of the sphere).

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, at the start of contact between the sphere and the low transmittance portion 2230 of the tubular member 2200, the sphere abuts on the second spiral portion 2230b of the tubular member 2200 and flows down. explain.

FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining the process of the sphere flowing down along the guide member 2300 in chronological order, and FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c) show the tubular member 2200, the guide member 2300, and the guide member 2300 in the assembled state. It is a front view of the decorative member 2500. The light irradiation device 2400 is not shown, the tubular member 2200 is shown with a broken line in a portion shielded by the decorative member 2500, and the decorative member 2500 is shown with a broken line at the fastening portion 2520 and the branch groove 2531. At the same time, the illustration of the low transmittance portion 2511 and the strip-shaped portion 2512 is omitted for ease of understanding. Note that FIG. 26 (b) shows a state in which the sphere has flowed down a predetermined distance from the state shown in FIG. 26 (a), and FIG. 26 (c) shows the sphere from the state shown in FIG. 26 (b). Is shown to flow down along the branch groove 2531.

As shown in FIG. 26A, the sphere comes into contact with the second spiral portion 2230b of the tubular member 2200 and flows down. Here, the sphere is prevented from moving in the horizontal direction by the drop guide portion 2330 of the guide member 2300, the guide portion 2350, the peripheral surface portion 2240 of the tubular member 2200, and the side surface on the back side of the connecting portion 2530 of the decorative member 2500. , The sphere is flowed vertically downward, and the low transmittance portion 2230 of the tubular member 2200 is pushed by the weight of the sphere, so that the tubular member 2200 is rotated. By rotating the tubular member 2200, the contact position between the sphere and the low transmittance portion 2230 is moved downward, and the sphere is caused to flow downward accordingly.

When the sphere flows down to the position shown in FIG. 26B, the branch groove 2531 of the decorative member 2500 is arranged on the front side of the sphere. When the sphere flows downward, it flows down by rotating the tubular member 2200, and therefore receives a resistance force from the tubular member 2200. Therefore, the resistance of the sphere is lower when it flows down toward the branch groove 2531 than when it flows down. Therefore, the sphere is flowed down through the branch groove 2531.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the sphere flows downward through the front side of the tubular member 2200. That is, in the process of flowing down, the sphere flows vertically downward on the left side of the tubular member 2200 when viewed from the front, but flows downward from the middle through the front side of the tubular member 2200.

Therefore, the path through which the ball flows can be changed depending on whether the ball is in contact with the first spiral portion 2230a or the second spiral portion 2230b of the tubular member 2200.

As described above in the first embodiment, the sphere produces the shadow Sh of the sphere irradiated from the light irradiation device 2400 (see FIG. 21) in the front view, and the shadow Sh of the sphere moves when the sphere flows down. Therefore, it is possible to create a shadow in the light (see FIG. 16). In the present embodiment, since the flow path of the sphere can be further branched, it is possible to form a plurality of movement paths of the shadow Sh of the sphere generated in the light, and it is possible to increase the pattern of the effect of the shadow Sh of the sphere. it can.

Whether the sphere is in contact with the first spiral portion 2230a or the second spiral portion 2230b of the tubular member 2200 depends on the posture of the tubular member 2200 when the sphere is flowed down. Is determined by. Then, for example, when the time from when the sphere is discharged downward of the tubular member 2200 to the end of the rotation of the tubular member 2200 varies, the tubular member 2200 when the sphere is flowed down The posture is randomly determined. Therefore, the posture of the tubular member 2200 when the rotation of the tubular member 2200 is stopped after the flowing ball is discharged from the tubular member 2200 is irregularly changed. Therefore, the selection of the flow path of the sphere (selection of whether the sphere is in contact with the first spiral portion 2230a or the second spiral portion 2230b) is also irregular, and the path of the sphere is branched. It is possible to make the effect of the spiral irregular and improve the effect of the effect.

Further, when the sphere is brought into contact with the first spiral portion 2230a at the start of contact between the sphere and the low transmittance portion 2230 of the tubular member 2200, the sphere is also brought into contact with the second spiral portion 2230b. Also in this case, immediately before the sphere is discharged from below the tubular member 2200, the low transmittance portion 2230 is formed so as to be in contact with a portion having a small inclination angle (the lower portion of the bent portion 2233).

Therefore, at the start of contact between the sphere and the low transmittance portion 2230 of the tubular member 2200, whether the sphere is in contact with the first spiral portion 2230a or the second spiral portion 2230b. Regardless of the rotation angle at which the tubular member 2200 is rotated when the sphere flows down a predetermined distance, the sphere is discharged below the tubular member 2200 rather than immediately after the sphere comes into contact with the low transmittance portion 2230. The one immediately before is smaller.

Therefore, at the start of contact between the sphere and the low transmittance portion 2230 of the tubular member 2200, whether the sphere is in contact with the first spiral portion 2230a or the second spiral portion 2230b. Regardless of this, the rotational speed of the tubular member 2200 can be changed. Therefore, when the tubular member 2200 is rotated, the moving speed of the light moved in the axial direction of the tubular member 2200 can be changed, so that the moving speed of the light becomes a constant speed, which produces an effect. It is possible to prevent it from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the effect of the movement of light visually recognized through the tubular member 2200.

Further, if the player remembers the rotation speed of the tubular member 2200 when the ball flows down in contact with the portion where the inclination angle of the low transmittance portion 2230 is small, the rotation speed of the tubular member 2200 can be confirmed. This makes it possible to confirm the timing at which the ball is discharged from the lower end of the tubular member 2200. Therefore, the flow position of the sphere can be confirmed by confirming the mode of the change in appearance visually recognized through the tubular member 2200 without paying attention to the sphere (or the shadow Sh of the sphere).

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the change in the outer shape of the light passing through the strip 2512 will be described. FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining the change in appearance caused by the movement of light visually recognized through the decorative member 2500 in the vertical direction in chronological order, and FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b) show the decorative member 2500. It is a partially enlarged front view of. Note that FIG. 27 (b) shows a state in which light is moved downward from the state shown in FIG. 27 (a). Since the technical idea of moving the light visually recognized through the decorative member 2500 downward is the same as the technical idea of moving the light visually recognized through the decorative member 1500 downward, the description thereof is omitted here.

As shown in FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b), the light is visually recognized with a uniform width regardless of the left and right positions of the decorative member 2500 before reaching the band-shaped portion 2512. On the other hand, when the light reaches the band-shaped portion 2512, the width direction of the light in the vicinity of the band-shaped portion 2512 (the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the band-shaped portion 2512) is reduced.

As described above, in the decorative member 2500, the overhanging portion and the flattened portion are alternately formed in each region where the strip-shaped portion 2512 is sandwiched between the pair of low transmittance portions 2511. Therefore, that part is sandwiched between the part where the light is shrunk by the light hitting the strip-shaped portion 2512 of the upper streak and the part where the light is shrunk by the light hitting the strip-shaped part 2512 of the lower streak. The pair of low transmittance portions 2511 are different. That is, when the regions sandwiched by the pair of low transmittance portions 2511 are expressed as the peripheral surfaces A and B, respectively, the peripheral surface A and the lower surface where the light is shrunk by the light reaching the strip-shaped portion 2512 of the upper streak. It is different from the peripheral surface B in which the light is shrunk when the light hits the strip-shaped portion 2512 of the side streaks.

In this case, for example, when light hits the strip-shaped portion 2512 of the upper streak, the light is shrunk on the peripheral surface A, but the light is not shrunk on the adjacent peripheral surface B. Further, when the light reaches the strip-shaped portion 2512 of the lower streak, the light is shrunk on the peripheral surface B, but the light is not shrunk on the adjacent peripheral surface A.

Therefore, in the outer shape of the light, the portion where the light is contracted and the portion where the outer shape of the light is maintained are alternately formed along the streaks of the strip-shaped portion 2512 (alternately between the peripheral surface A and the peripheral surface B). , The pattern of light visually recognized through the decorative member 2500 can be made into a more complicated shape.

Further, when the light moving up and down is visually recognized through the decorative member 2500, the peripheral surface on which the light is shrunk when the light approaches the band-shaped portion 2512 is set to the position (upper side or lower side) of the plurality of strip-shaped portions 2512. ), By making the peripheral surface A or the peripheral surface B different, the change in the outer shape of the visually recognized light can be made more complicated.

Therefore, the pattern of the moving light visually recognized through the decorative member 2500 is changed in a complicated manner during the movement, and the pattern of the light is changed at an arbitrary position of the decorative member 2500. Therefore, the effect of the light effect device 2000 (see FIG. 17) can be improved.

Here, for example, when light is applied to the entire width direction of the decorative member 2500 from the back side of the decorative member 2500 and the light is moved in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 27), the front side of the decorative member 2500. When the light is visually recognized through the decorative member 2500, it can be visually recognized as if the light is moved along the low transmittance section 2511 between the adjacent low transmittance sections 2511.

Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 17), when the tubular member 2200 is rotated so that the light is visually recognized as being moved in the axial direction of the tubular member 2200, the light is passed through the decorative member 2500. When the movement of the light is visually recognized, it is visually recognized that the light is moved along the low transmittance portion 2511 of the decorative member 2500. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the light as if it is inclined and moves in the axial direction of the tubular member 2200, and it is possible to improve the effect of the movement of the light.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 31. In the light effect device 1000 of the first embodiment, the sphere pushes the low transmittance portion 1230 of the tubular member 1200 by its own weight in the process of flowing down vertically in a state where the sphere is in contact with the tubular member 1200. Although the case where the tubular member 1200 is rotated by advancing is described, in the light effect device 3000 of the third embodiment, the sphere collides with the transmitting portion 3300 formed on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member 3200. Then, the case where the tubular member 3200 is rotated will be described. The same parts as those in each embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 28 is a front perspective view of the light effect device 3000. In FIG. 28, the side surface of the tubular member 3200 and the decorative member 1500 are partially omitted, and the internal structure of the tubular member 3200 is partially illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 28, the light effect device 3000 is arranged in a path through which the introduction cylinder 3083 formed in the outer wall portion 82 is passed when the ball flows down, and is rotatable outside the introduction cylinder 3083. A tubular member 3200 to be fitted, a light irradiation device 1400 that is non-rotatably fitted to the introduction cylinder 3083 and irradiates light toward the tubular member 3200, and an arrangement on the front side of the tubular member 3200. It is provided with a decorative member 1500, which is provided and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material.

The introduction cylinder 3083 is a tubular member formed of a metal material extending below the outer wall portion 82, and the inner diameter dimension in the minor axis direction is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the game board 13 ( One end is fixed around an elongated hole formed in the left-right direction (see FIG. 2), and on the outer peripheral surface of the other end, which is the opposite end of the one end. It has a groove-shaped outer fitting groove 3083a (see FIG. 30) formed in an annular shape over the periphery.

The introduction cylinder 3083 is formed so that the major axis direction of the inner diameter is reduced from one end to the other end, and the inner diameter and the outer diameter of the cylinder are circular at the other end. , The degree of diameter reduction in the major axis direction is asymmetric (see FIG. 30). Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the direction in which the ball enters the introduction cylinder 3083 in the major axis direction, and the tubular member 3200 can be rotated outside at the lower end of the introduction cylinder 3083. It can be fitted, and there are multiple types of flow directions (angles with respect to the axis) of the flowing ball with respect to the axial center of the tubular member 3200, depending on the direction in which the ball flows down along the inner peripheral surface of the introduction cylinder 3083 in the major axis direction. Can be formed.

The tubular member 3200 is assembled into a circular cross-section by facing each other and fitting members having a shape obtained by dividing the tubular shape by a plane including the axis, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), the outside of the introduction cylinder 3083. It is rotatably fitted into the fitting groove 3083a (see FIG. 30). Further, the tubular member 3200 is provided with a sliding end portion 3211 outerly fitted in the outer fitting groove 3083a of the introduction cylinder 3083 at one end portion (upper side of FIG. 28), and the one end portion to the other end portion ( A diameter-expanded portion 3210 formed by concentrically expanding the diameter toward the lower side of FIG. 28 and formed from a metal material, and one end portion (upper side of FIG. 28) at the other end portion of the diameter-expanded portion 3210. ) Is fitted and fixed, and the diameter is reduced from one end toward the other end (lower side in FIG. 28), which is the opposite end, and is a light-transmitting resin material. It is provided with a main body portion 3220 formed from the above, and a plurality of transmission portions 3300 formed near the upper end of the main body portion 3220 and extending from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 3220 to the vicinity of the axial center.

Since the enlarged diameter portion 3200 is formed of a metal material, it is possible to prevent the member from being deformed or scraped when the sliding end portion 3211 is slid into the outer fitting groove 3083a (see FIG. 30). The durability of the tubular member 3200 can be improved. Further, even when the tubular member 3200 becomes difficult to rotate due to sliding friction, it is possible to make the tubular member 3200 easier to rotate by adding oil. Examples of the metal material forming the enlarged diameter portion 3200 include brass and aluminum.

The main body portion 3220 is a peripheral surface that connects the low transmittance portion 3230 (see FIG. 31) formed by projecting from the inner peripheral surface in a double helix shape and the peripheral surface on which the low transmittance portion 3230 is formed. A peripheral surface portion 3240 having a constant radial thickness, and in a plane orthogonal to the axis toward the other end (lower side in FIG. 28) from one end (upper side in FIG. 28). The cross-sectional shape is concentric and the diameter is reduced, and an opening through which a sphere can be discharged is formed at the other end. Since the technical idea of the cross-sectional shape of the low transmittance portion 3230 is the same as the technical idea of the cross-sectional shape of the low transmittance portion 1230 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, since the tubular member 3200 is externally fitted to the introduction cylinder 3083 on one side and is pivotally supported, friction during rotation of the tubular member 3200 does not occur at both ends of the tubular member 3200, and the sliding end. It is limited to the friction generated in the portion 3211. Therefore, the friction during rotation of the tubular member 3200 can be reduced.

Next, the shape of the transmission unit 3300 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. 29 (a) is a top view of the main body portion 3220 of the tubular member 3200, and FIG. 29 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission portion 3300 in the XXIXb-XXIXb line of FIG. 29 (a). (C) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission unit 3300 in the XXIXc-XXIXc line of FIG. 29 (a). Note that FIG. 29 (a) shows a shape viewed from the large diameter side in the axial direction, and FIGS. 29 (b) and 29 (c) show only a cross-sectional portion.

The transmission unit 3300 includes six deformed vanes that are erected at equal intervals in the radial direction from the inner peripheral surface of the tubular member 3200, and each of these deformed vanes has the same shape. The deformed wing portion of 1 will be described, and the description of the other deformed wing portions will be omitted. The transmission portion 3300 includes a first collision surface 3310 formed of a resin material and formed near the peripheral surface of the tubular member 3200, and a second collision surface 3320 formed near the axial center of the tubular member 3200. , A rod-shaped connecting portion 3330 that connects the first collision surface 3310 and the second collision surface 3320 in the radial direction.

In the top view, the distance G31 of the space between the adjacent first collision surfaces 3310, which has the widest gap near the peripheral surface of the tubular member 3200, is formed to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere, so that it is tubular. In the vicinity of the peripheral surface of the member 3200, the sphere flowing down the inner peripheral side of the tubular member 3200 always collides with any of the first collision surfaces 3310. Therefore, the tubular member 3200 is rotated by being collided with the flowing sphere, and then the sphere passes through the vertical gap (see FIG. 28) between the first collision surface 3310 and the second collision surface 3320. The ball is swept down.

Further, in the top view, the distance G32 in the space of the second collision surface 3320 facing each other across the axial center of the tubular member 3200 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the sphere, so that the axial center of the tubular member 3200 is formed. The sphere that flows down in the vicinity is formed so that it can flow down without colliding with any part of the transmission unit 3300.

As shown in FIG. 29B, the first collision surface 3310 of the transmission unit 3300 is formed in a plate shape in which the shape visible from the radial inside of the tubular member 3200 is inclined downward to the right. .. Therefore, when the ball flows down and collides with the first collision surface 3310, the tubular member 3200 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from above. In the present embodiment, the inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction is formed by θ.

As shown in FIG. 29 (c), the second collision surface 3320 of the transmission unit 3300 is formed in a plate shape in which the shape visible from the radial inside of the tubular member 3200 is inclined downward to the left. .. Therefore, when the ball flows down and collides with the second collision surface 3320, the tubular member 3200 is rotated clockwise when viewed from above. In the present embodiment, the inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction is equal to the inclination angle of the first collision 3310 and is formed at θ.

That is, when the sphere collides with the first collision surface 3310 or the second collision surface 3320, the tubular member 3200 can be rotated in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions. Therefore, as described later, the cylinder By rotating the shaped member 3200, the light visually recognized in the front view can be visually recognized by the player in a manner of being moved upward, or can be visually recognized by the player in a manner of being moved downward.

Here, the first collision surface 3310 and the second collision surface 3320 are formed in a direction opposite to the vertical direction and are formed at θ having the same inclination angle, so that the spheres flow down. However, for example, when a collision occurs with the first collision surface 3310 or the second collision surface 3320 at a vertical downward direction and at a constant velocity, the magnitude of the collision force in the rotational direction received by the cylindrical member 3200 due to the collision is the same. However, since the distance from the axis of the tubular member 3200 in which the collision occurs is different, the rotational torque generated is different.

That is, the rotational torque is larger when the sphere collides with the first collision surface 3310 than when the sphere collides with the second collision surface 3320. When the rotational torque is large, the tubular member 3200 is rotated at a higher speed.

Therefore, the rotational speed of the tubular member 3200 rotated by the collision of the spheres is higher when the tubular member 3200 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the upper surface than when it is rotated clockwise when viewed from the upper surface. As a result, the moving speed of the light when it is visually recognized as being moved in the axial direction of the tubular member 3200 by rotating the tubular member 3200 (see FIG. 31). Can be changed for each direction (upward or downward), and the mode of the speed of the effect of light movement can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the relationship between the path of the sphere flowing down the inner peripheral surface of the tubular member 3200 and the tubular member 3200 will be described. FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view of the introduction cylinder 3083 and the tubular member 3200. The cross section is viewed in a plane including the axis of the tubular member 3200 and the major axis of one end of the introduction cylinder 3083.

As shown in FIG. 30, the inner diameter of the introduction cylinder 3083 is formed in such a manner that the diameter is gradually reduced in the major axis direction, and the degree of the diameter reduction is formed asymmetrically with respect to the major axis direction. By flowing down along the inner peripheral surface of the 3083, the sphere is greatly inclined with respect to the axial direction of the tubular member 3200, and the direction D31 toward the first collision surface 3310 and the axial center of the tubular member 3200. It is possible to flow down by a path such as direction D32 toward the second collision surface 3320 in a direction slightly inclined with respect to the direction.

Further, for example, when the sphere flows down along the axial direction of the tubular member 3200, the sphere passes through the gap (see FIG. 29) at the center of the transmission portion 3300, so that the sphere of the transmission portion 3300 It does not collide with anything and the tubular member 3200 does not rotate.

For example, when the sphere flows down in the direction D31, the sphere collides with the first collision surface 3310 of the transmission unit 3300, and the tubular member 3200 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from above. Further, for example, when the sphere flows down in the direction D32, the sphere collides with the second collision surface 3320 of the transmission unit 3300, and the tubular member 3200 is rotated clockwise when viewed from above.

Here, when light is visually recognized through the tubular member 3200 when the sphere flows down the inner peripheral side of the tubular member 3200, as described above in the first embodiment, the shadow Sh of the sphere is reflected in the visually recognized light. (See FIG. 16) occurs. Since a plurality of paths may occur in the flow path of the sphere leading to the transmission unit 3300, a plurality of paths may also occur in the movement path of the shadow Sh of the sphere flowing down the light effect device 3000 in the front view. Therefore, it is possible to increase the types of movement paths of the shadow Sh of the sphere that is visually recognized through the tubular member 3200 in the front view, and it is possible to improve the effect of the effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a change in the pattern of light visually recognized through the tubular member 3200 in front view will be described. 31 (a) to 31 (c) are front views of the light effect device 3000. Note that FIG. 31 (b) shows a state in which the tubular member 3200 is rotated by a predetermined angle counterclockwise when viewed from above from the state shown in FIG. 31 (a), and FIG. 31 (c) shows a state in which the tubular member 3200 is rotated by a predetermined angle. A state in which the tubular member 3200 is rotated by a predetermined angle clockwise from the state shown in (a) is shown, and FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (c) show the decorative member 1500. Omitted.

By rotating the tubular member 3200, the position of the low transmittance portion 3230 in the front view is moved in the axial direction of the tubular member 3200, and the light visually recognized through the tubular member 3200 is moved in the axial direction. The technical idea of visually recognizing in the movable mode is that the light visually recognized through the tubular member 1200 is visually recognized in the axial direction by rotating the tubular member 1200 (see FIG. 11). Since it is common to the above-mentioned technical idea in the first embodiment, the description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 31 (b), when the tubular member 3200 is rotated counterclockwise (rotation direction R1) when viewed from above, the low transmittance portion 3230 moves upward (upward in FIG. 31 (b)). Will be done. In this case, the light visually recognized through the tubular member 3200 is visually recognized in an upwardly moving manner. Here, since the cross-sectional shape of the tubular member 3200 increases as it goes upward, the width of the tubular member 3200 and the area of each region surrounded by the low transmittance portion 3230 are the tubular member 3200 in the front view. The upper side is larger than the lower side.

Therefore, as the tubular member 3200 is rotated and the light is moved upward, the outer shape of the light becomes larger. That is, since the player can simultaneously visually recognize the two changes of the change in which the light is moved and the change in which the light is magnified, the effect of producing the light can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 31 (c), when the tubular member 3200 is rotated clockwise in the top view (rotation direction R2), the low transmittance portion 3230 is moved downward (downward in FIG. 31 (c)). To. In this case, the light visually recognized through the tubular member 3200 is visually recognized in a manner of being moved downward. Here, since the cross-sectional shape of the tubular member 3200 is reduced as it goes downward, the width of the tubular member 3200 and the area of each region surrounded by the low transmittance portion 3230 are the tubular member 3200 in the front view. The lower side is smaller than the upper side of.

Therefore, as the tubular member 3200 is rotated and the light is moved downward, the outer shape of the light becomes smaller. That is, since the player can simultaneously visually recognize the two changes of the change in which the light is moved and the change in which the light is reduced, it is possible to improve the effect of producing the light.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. In the light effect device 1000 of the first embodiment, the case where the tubular member 1200 has a circular cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis has been described, but in the light effect device 4000 of the fourth embodiment, the tubular member 4200 is A case will be described in which a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis is formed in an elliptical shape, and a load can be applied to the refracting member 4430 adjacent to the tubular member 4200 on the outer peripheral surface of the tubular member 4200. The same parts as those in each embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 32 is a front perspective view of the light effect device 4000. As shown in FIG. 32, the light effect device 4000 is arranged in a path through which the introduction cylinder 83 formed in the outer wall portion 82 is passed when the ball flows down, and is rotatably outside the introduction cylinder 83. A tubular member 4200 to be fitted, a guide member 1300 (see FIG. 6), and a light irradiation device 4400 that is non-rotatably fitted in the introduction cylinder 83 and irradiates light toward the tubular member 4200. A decorative member (not shown) which is arranged on the front side of the tubular member 4200 and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material.

As shown in FIG. 32, the tubular member 4200 has an elliptical cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis, and is rotatably supported by the outer fitting groove 83a (see FIG. 6) of the introduction cylinder 83 in the assembled state. Will be done.

The tubular member 4200 is provided with a sliding end portion 1211 outerly fitted in the outer fitting groove 83a (see FIG. 6) of the introduction cylinder 83 at one end (upper side of FIG. 32), and the other end is provided with the other. A diameter-expanded portion 1210 formed by expanding the diameter toward an end portion (lower side in FIG. 32) and formed from a metal material, and one end portion (upper side in FIG. 32) at the other end portion of the diameter-expanded portion 1210. ) Is fitted and fixed, and extends from one end to the other end (lower side in FIG. 32) having the same shape and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material. It includes a main body 4220.

The main body portion 4220 is based on the main body portion 1220 (see FIG. 5) in the first embodiment, and has a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis having a length Da in the major axis direction and a length Db (Da> Db) in the minor axis direction. It is formed in a shape in which the outer circumference is partially thickened so as to have an elliptical shape formed from (see FIG. 33 (b)). Therefore, as described above in the first embodiment, the low transmittance portion 1230 (see FIG. 6) is formed so as to project from the inner peripheral surface of the tubular member 4200, and the guide member 1300 (FIG. 6) is formed on the low transmittance portion 1230. The tubular member 4200 is rotated by the contact of the balls flowing down along (see 6).

Further, the outer peripheral surface of the main body 4220 is formed at substantially the same pitch as the low transmittance portion 1230, and is formed in a spiral shape inclined at a constant inclination angle at the axis of the main body 4220, and also transmits light. A low transmittance portion 4230 on the outer peripheral side is formed, which is formed to have a lower transmittance than other portions of the main body portion 4220.

The outer peripheral side low transmittance portion 4230 is masked by attaching a tape to a portion other than the shape of the outer peripheral side low transmittance portion 4230 to be formed on the main body portion 4220, and the paint having low transmittance is sprayed to dry the paint. It is formed by peeling off the tape later.

The tubular member 4200 and the light irradiation device 4400 have a relationship in which the tubular member 4200 can come into contact with a refracting member 4430 which is swingably arranged on the front side of the light irradiation device 4400, which will be described later, and swing. It is formed. Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the positional relationship between the tubular member 4200 and the light irradiation device 4400 will be described.

33 (a) is a side view of the tubular member 4200 and the light irradiation device 4400, and FIGS. 33 (b) and 33 (c) are top views of the tubular member 4200 and the light irradiation device 4400. Note that FIG. 33 (b) shows a state in which the tubular member 4200 faces the light irradiation device 4400 in the minor axis direction, and FIG. 33 (c) shows a state in which the tubular member 4200 points in the major axis direction toward the light irradiation device 4400. The oriented state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (c), the light irradiation device 4400 is a device that irradiates the tubular member 4200 and the decorative member 1500 (see FIG. 5) with light from the back surface side, and is an introduction cylinder 83. It is provided with a base portion 1410 that is externally fitted and fixed, a plurality of light sources 1420 that are fixed to the front side of the base portion 1410, and a refracting member 4430 that is swingably formed on the front side of the light source 1420.

In the present embodiment, four light sources 1420 are arranged on the central axis of the base portion 1410, that is, in the front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 32), on the axial center of the tubular member 4200 at equal intervals in the vertical direction. To. Among those light sources 1420, the refraction member 4430 is arranged in each of the light source 1421 arranged at the top and the light source 1423 arranged third from the top, and the refraction members 4430 are horizontal to each other. It is formed so as to be swung in the opposite direction in the direction (direction along the paper surface in FIG. 33B).

As shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 33 (c), in the tubular member 4200 and the light irradiation device 4400, the tubular member 4200 faces the light irradiation device 4400 in the minor axis direction (FIG. 33 (b)). In (see), the tubular member 4200 is not in contact with the refracting member 4430, and in a state where the tubular member 4200 faces the light irradiation device 4400 in the major axis direction (see FIG. 33C), the refracting member 4430 has a tubular shape. The member 4200 is brought into contact with the member 4200 and the refraction member 4430 is arranged in a positional relationship in which the member 4230 is swung.

By swinging the refracting member 4430, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light sources 1421, 1423 of the light irradiation device 4400 is changed, and the outer shape of the light visually recognized in the front view is changed. Next, with reference to FIG. 34, an aspect of the refracting member 4430 before and after the swing and the path of the light emitted from the light sources 1421, 1423 will be described.

34 (a) and 34 (b) are top views of the base portion 1410 and the refracting member 4430 of the light irradiation device 4400. In addition, FIG. 34A shows a state in which the refracting member 4430 is in an inclined posture with respect to the base portion 1410 due to the elastic force of the coil spring arranged between one end of the refracting member 4430 and the base portion 1410. As shown in FIG. 34 (b), the refracting member 4430 is brought into contact with the tubular member 4200 to press the refracting member 4430 toward the base portion 1410, and the refracting member 4430 is in a posture parallel to the base portion 1410. The state to be said is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b), typical paths L41 and L42 of the light emitted from the light source 1420 are shown, and the outer shape of the tubular member 4200 is shown by a broken line.

As shown in FIG. 34, the refracting member 4430 includes a rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 4431, a claw portion 4432 formed at one end of the main body portion 4431, and a side opposite to one end on which the claw portion 4432 is formed. It includes a stopper portion 4433 formed at the end opposite to the base portion 1410, and is formed of a light-transmitting material. Examples of the light-transmitting material include resin materials such as PET, PC, and acrylic, and plate-shaped glass.

The main body portion 4431 is formed in a rectangular plate shape having a constant thickness. The claw portion 4432 is composed of a pair of portions (see FIG. 34 (a), one of which is shown) protruding from the side surface of the main body portion 4431 in a horseshoe shape. Each of the pair of horseshoe-shaped overhanging portions is slidably fitted onto a swing shaft extending in the vertical direction on the front side of the base portion 1410, whereby the refracting member 4430 is fitted to the base portion 1410. On the other hand, it is formed so as to be swingable in the horizontal direction.

The stopper portion 4433 is formed in a box shape having an opening on the base portion 1410 side, and is formed in a size capable of accommodating a coil spring on the inner peripheral side thereof, and the stopper portion 4433 is pressed against the base portion 1410. The main body portion of the refracting member 4430 and the base portion 1410 are projected to a height parallel to each other. In the state where the stopper portion 4433 is pressed against the base portion 1410, the coil spring is housed in the stopper portion 4433, and the overhanging end surface of the stopper portion 4433 comes into contact with the base portion 1410 (see FIG. 34 (b)).

The paths L41 and L42 of the light emitted from the light source 1421 will be described. As shown in FIG. 34 (a), when the refracting member 4430 is tilted with respect to the base portion 1410 without being pressed against the base portion 1410, it is the lower side of the light emitted from the light source 1421. The light passing through the path L41 has a shorter distance to reach the refraction member 4430 than the light passing through the upper path L42, and by passing through the refraction member 4430, the light passes in the left direction (downward in FIG. 34A). ) Is refracted.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), when the refracting member 4430 is pressed against the base portion 1410, the light emitted from the light source 1421 that passes through the lower path L41 also passes through the upper path L42. In both cases, the distance to reach the refracting member 4430 is the same, and the light emitted from the light source 1421 travels straight.

Therefore, the traveling direction of the light emitted toward the tubular member 4200 can be changed depending on the posture of the refracting member 4430. Here, since the change in the posture of the refracting member 4430 is linked with the change in the posture of the tubular member 4200 as described above, the change in the posture of the tubular member 4200 and the light emitted toward the tubular member 4200. Changes in the traveling direction (direction perpendicular to the axis) can be linked. Next, the mode of light visually recognized through the tubular member 4200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36.

35 and 36 are front views of the tubular member 4200 and the light irradiation device 4400. In addition, FIG. 35 shows a state in which the tubular member 4200 faces the light irradiation device 4400 in the minor axis direction (see FIG. 33B), and FIG. 36 shows a state in which the tubular member 4200 directs the light irradiation device in the major axis direction. The state toward the 4400 (see FIG. 33 (c)) is shown, and in FIGS. 35 and 36, the pattern of the light when the light emitted from the light source 1420 is visually recognized through the tubular member 4200 is shaded. Illustrated in.

As shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 35, when the minor axis direction of the tubular member 4200 is directed toward the light irradiation device 4400, the refraction member 4430 is tilted with respect to the base portion 1410 of the light irradiation device 4400. Since the refracting member 4430 takes an attitude, the light emitted from the light source 1421 (top of FIG. 33 (a)) and the light source 1423 (third from top of FIG. 33 (a)) in which the refracting member 4430 is arranged on the front side is emitted. , Refracted horizontally.

As described above, since the refracting members 4430 arranged in front of the light sources 1421, 1423 are formed in such a manner that they swing in opposite directions, the refraction direction of the light emitted from the light sources 1421, 1423 is different. Each is in the opposite direction. That is, since the refraction member 4430 arranged in front of the light source 1421 is swung around the right side in the front view (front side in FIG. 33A), the light emitted from the light source 1421 is on the right side in the front view. Be refracted. Further, since the refraction member 4430 arranged in front of the light source 1423 is swung around the left side in the front view (the back side in FIG. 33A), the light emitted from the light source 1423 is on the left side in the front view. Be refracted.

As a result, the pattern formed by the light emitted from the light source 1420 (see FIG. 33) of the light irradiation device 4400 is visually recognized as an S-shaped curve in front view through the tubular member 4200. This can be easily formed when the light source 1420 is arranged in a shape in which an S-shaped curve is drawn in advance (a shape corresponding to the pattern of light to be visually recognized), but the arrangement position of the light source 1420 is the base portion 1410. Since it depends on the design, it is often impossible to arrange the light source 1420 at a desired position.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by refracting the light emitted from the light source 1420 (see FIG. 33) by using the refracting member 4430, the pattern of the light that can be visually recognized without depending on the arrangement of the light source 1420. Can be designed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the light pattern visually recognized through the tubular member 4200 can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 33 (c) and 36, when the major axis direction of the tubular member 4200 is directed toward the light irradiation device 4400, the refraction member 4430 is pressed against the base portion 1410 of the light irradiation device 4400. Light source 1421 (top of FIG. 33 (a)) and light source 1423 (FIG. 33 (a)) in which the base portion 1410 and the main body portion 4431 of the refraction member 4430 are arranged in parallel and the refraction member 4430 is arranged on the front side. The light emitted from the third from the top) goes straight.

Here, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), in a state where the major axis direction of the tubular member 4200 is directed to the light irradiation device 4400, the inside of the thickened portion (major axis direction portion) of the tubular member 4200. , The part on the back side acts as a convex lens. Therefore, since the directivity of the light emitted from the light source 1420 is weak, the range in which the light emitted at a position away from the axis of the tubular member 4200 is emitted toward the front side surface of the tubular member 4200. Can be concentrated near the axis of the tubular member 4200.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36, the light can be concentrated near the axis of the tubular member 4200 in the front view. As a result, the light emitted from the light source 1420 in a state where the minor axis direction of the tubular member 4200 is directed to the light irradiation device 4400 is spread in the left-right direction and visually recognized, and the major axis direction of the tubular member 4200 is light. The difference in the shape (pattern) of the light in the horizontal direction (FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 in the left-right direction) is different in that the light emitted from the light source 1420 in the state of being directed to the irradiation device 4400 is focused near the axis. Can be increased, and the effect of changing the shape (pattern) of light visually recognized through the tubular member 4200 can be improved.

Here, since the swing angle of the refracting member 4430 is gradually changed from the state shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 35 to the state shown in FIGS. 33 (c) and 36, the swing angle of the refracting member 4430 is gradually changed. The pattern of light emitted from the light source 1420 (see FIG. 33) visually recognized through the tubular member 4200 is visually recognized in a manner of being gradually focused on the axis. That is, since the light pattern is not changed intermittently but is continuously changed, it is possible for the player to easily discriminate the change in the light pattern.

Here, the lateral peripheral lengths of the outer peripheral surfaces of the tubular member 4200 included in the acute-angled predetermined angle α shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 33 (c) are different from each other. That is, when visually recognizing from the major axis direction (see FIG. 33 (c)), the peripheral length of the outer peripheral surface at a predetermined angle α is larger than when visually recognizing from the minor axis direction (see FIG. 33 (b)). become longer.

Since the low transmittance portion 4230 on the outer peripheral side is formed at a constant inclination angle, the outer circumference can be visually recognized from the direction perpendicular to the axis by visually recognizing the peripheral length of the tubular member 4200 and the tubular member 4200 when the tubular member 4200 is rotated. The side low transmittance portion 4230 has a proportional relationship with the movement width that is visually recognized as being moved in the axial direction of the tubular member 4200.

Therefore, when the tubular member 4200 is rotated at a constant rotation speed, when the tubular member 4200 is rotated by a predetermined angle α from the state shown in FIG. 33 (b), the outer peripheral side low transparency that is visually recognized in the front view is low. When the tubular member 4200 is rotated by a predetermined angle α from the state of FIG. 33 (c), it is visually recognized in front view from the movement width in which the rate portion 4230 is moved in the axial direction of the tubular member 4200. The width of movement of the outer peripheral side low transmission rate portion 4230 in the axial direction of the tubular member 4200 is larger.

That is, even when the tubular member 4200 is rotated at a constant speed, the movement of the light visually recognized in such a manner that the tubular member 4200 is rotated in the axial direction of the tubular member 4200. The speed is not constant, and the movement speed is slow or slow. Therefore, even when the rotational speed of the tubular member 4200 is formed to be constant, the moving speed of the light can be changed, so that the effect of moving the visually recognized light can be effectively performed.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. In the light effect device 4000 of the fourth embodiment, the case where the tubular member 4200 has an elliptical cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis has been described, but in the light effect device 5000 of the fifth embodiment, the tubular member The case where the 5200 has an elliptical cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis and the elliptical major axis direction and the minor axis direction are switched at a predetermined position in the axial center direction will be described. The light effect device 5000 includes a light irradiation device 4400, but since the light irradiation device 4400 is as described above in the fourth embodiment, the description of the light irradiation device 4400 will be omitted and each embodiment will be omitted. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 37 (a) is a top view of the tubular member 5200, and FIG. 37 (b) is a front view of the tubular member 5200. As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the tubular member 5200 is provided with a sliding end portion 1211 externally fitted to the introduction cylinder 83 (see FIG. 6) at one end (upper side of FIG. 37 (b)). A diameter-expanded portion 1210 formed by expanding the diameter from one end to the other end (lower side in FIG. 37 (b)) and formed from a metal material, and the other of the diameter-expanded portion 1210. One end (upper side of FIG. 37 (b)) is fitted and fixed to the end, and one end extends from the other end to the other end (lower side of FIG. 37 (b)) which is the opposite end. It includes a main body 5220, which is provided and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material.

The main body portion 5220 is based on the main body portion 1220 (see FIGS. 5 and 6) in the first embodiment, and has a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis, which is a length Da in the major axis direction and a length Db (Da) in the minor axis direction. > Db) is formed in an elliptical shape with the outer circumference partially thickened. Further, when the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member 5200 is visually recognized while moving from one end to the other along the axis of the tubular member 5200, the major axis of the elliptical member 5200. The relationship between the direction and the minor axis direction is formed in such a manner that the relationship is exchanged at a position M intermediate in the axial direction of the main body portion 5220.

Further, the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 5220 is formed at substantially the same pitch as the low transmittance portion 1230, and is formed in a spiral shape inclined at a constant inclination angle at the axis of the main body portion 5220, and also transmits light. A low transmittance portion 4230 on the outer peripheral side is formed, which is formed to have a lower transmittance than other portions of the main body portion 5220.

Here, as described above in the first embodiment, the low transmittance portion 1230 (see FIG. 6) formed overhanging the inner peripheral surface of the tubular member 5200 is formed along the guide member 1300 (see FIG. 6). The tubular member 5200 is rotated by the contact of the flowing balls. Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40, changes in appearance when the tubular member 5200 is rotated will be described.

38 to 40 are views for explaining the process of rotating the tubular member 5200 in chronological order, and FIGS. 38 (a), 39 (a) and 40 (a) show the tubular member 5200 and It is a top view of the light irradiation device 4400, and FIGS. 38 (b), 39 (b) and 40 (b) are front views of the tubular member 5200 and the light irradiation device 4400. Note that FIGS. 38 (b), 39 (b) and 40 (b) show the appearance of the tubular member 5200 in which the light emitted from the light source 1420 is visually recognized through the tubular member 5200.

With respect to the tubular member 5200 and the light irradiation device 4400, when the tubular member 5200 faces the light irradiation device 4400 in the major axis direction, the stopper portion 4433 (see FIG. 34) presses against the base portion 1410 of the light irradiation device 4400. When the minor axis direction of the tubular member 5200 is directed toward the light irradiation device 4400, the tubular member 5200 and the refraction member 4430 are formed in a positional relationship so as not to be in contact with each other.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the upper side of the tubular member 5200 faces the light irradiation device 4400 in the minor axis direction and the lower side of the tubular member 5200 points in the major axis direction toward the light irradiation device 4400, the light irradiation device As the refracting member 4430 (see FIG. 34) arranged on the lower side of the 4400 is swung, the light is visually recognized on the lower side of the position M in a manner focused on the axis, and is on the upper side of the position M. In, the shape of the light is spread to the left and right in the shape of an S-shaped curve and is visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 39, when rotated 45 ° clockwise from top view from FIG. 38, the tubular member 5200 abuts on the refracting member 4430 (see FIG. 34) both above and below position M. , The refracting member 4430 takes an inclined posture with respect to the base portion 1410. Therefore, the light emitted from the light irradiating device 4400 is refracted by the refracting member 4430, and the outer shape of the light visually recognized through the tubular member 5200 in the front view is spread to the left and right in an S-shaped curve and visually recognized. Ru. In this case, the inclination angle of the refracting member 4430 with respect to the base portion 1410 is formed to be smaller than the inclination angle when the refracting member 4430 is not in contact with the tubular member 5200.

As shown in FIG. 40, when the tubular member 5200 is further rotated by 45 ° clockwise from the top view, the lower side of the tubular member 5200 points in the minor axis direction toward the light irradiation device 4400 and from the position M. The upper side is formed so that the major axis direction is directed toward the light irradiation device 4400. In this case, as the refraction member 4430 (see FIG. 34) arranged on the upper side of the light irradiation device 4400 is swung, the light is visually recognized in a mode in which the light is focused on the axis above the position M. On the lower side of the position M, the shape of the light is spread to the left and right in the shape of an S-shaped curve and is visually recognized. Therefore, the mode of change of the light pattern visually recognized through the tubular member 5200 in the front view is increased as compared with the case where the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis is formed into a constant elliptical shape (see FIG. 32). be able to.

Here, the swing angle of the refracting member 4430 varies from the state shown in FIG. 38 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 39 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 40 (b). Since it is gradually changed, the pattern of light emitted from the light source 1420 that is visually recognized through the tubular member 5200 is visually recognized in such a manner that it is gradually focused on the axis or gradually separated from the axis. .. That is, since the light pattern is not changed intermittently but is continuously changed, it is possible for the player to easily discriminate the change in the light pattern.

Further, the speed of movement of the light visually recognized in the mode of being moved in the axial direction of the tubular member 5200 with the position M as a boundary is emphasized. For example, when the tubular member 5200 is formed in a posture in which the minor axis direction thereof faces the light irradiation device 4400 above the position M (see FIG. 38 (a)), a predetermined angle α (see FIG. 38 (a)). The horizontal peripheral length of the outer peripheral surface of the tubular member 5200 included in) is longer at the lower side of the position M than at the upper side of the position M.

Therefore, when the tubular member 5200 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle α from the state shown in FIG. 38 (a), the outer peripheral side low transmittance portion 4230 is the axis of the tubular member 5200 in the front view. The movement width visually recognized in the mode of being moved in the central direction is larger on the lower side of the position M than on the upper side of the position M. That is, when the tubular member 5200 is rotated clockwise in the top view and the pattern of light visually recognized through the tubular member 5200 is visually recognized in such a manner that it is moved upward, the time in the state shown in FIG. 38 is shown. Before and after the target, the moving speed of light becomes slow with the position M as the boundary.

For example, when the tubular member 5200 is formed in a posture in which the major axis direction thereof faces the light irradiation device 4400 above the position M (see FIG. 40 (a)), a predetermined angle α (see FIG. 40 (a)). The horizontal peripheral length of the outer peripheral surface of the tubular member 5200 included in the above is longer on the upper side of the position M than on the lower side of the position M.

Therefore, when the tubular member 5200 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle α from the state shown in FIG. 40 (a), the outer peripheral side low transmittance portion 4230 is the axis of the tubular member 5200 in the front view. The movement width visually recognized in the mode of being moved in the central direction is larger on the upper side of the position M than on the lower side of the position M. That is, when the tubular member 5200 is rotated clockwise in the top view and the pattern of light visually recognized through the tubular member 5200 is visually recognized in such a manner that it is moved upward, the time in the state shown in FIG. 40 is shown. Before and after the target, the moving speed of light becomes rapid with the position M as the boundary.

Therefore, even when the rotational speed of the tubular member 5200 is formed to be constant, the moving speed of light can be further increased by switching the speed of movement of the tubular member 5200 in the axial direction at position M. It is possible to easily discriminate the change of.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

The pachinko machine 10 may be configured by combining or replacing some or all of the configurations of one of the above embodiments with some or all of the configurations of the other embodiments.

In the first embodiment, the case where the main body portion 1220 of the tubular member 1200 is formed in a tubular shape from a light-transmitting resin material has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, both ends of the tubular member may be formed. A bent plate-shaped panel wall material made of a light-transmitting resin material is fitted into a metal frame consisting of a pair of ring-shaped members to be formed and a plurality of connecting members connecting the ring-shaped members. The shape member 1200 may be configured so as to partially have a light transmitting portion. In this case, since the tubular member 1200 is rotated, the metallic connecting member shields the light emitted from the light irradiation device 1400, so that the pattern of the visible light can be changed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the decorative member 1500 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, a light-transmitting resin material is used for a metal frame. By fitting a flat plate-shaped panel wall material made of the above material, the panel wall material may be configured to partially have a light transmitting portion. In this case, even if the low transmittance portion 1511 is not formed on the decorative member 1500, the metal frame shields the light. Therefore, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 1400 is transmitted by the decorative member 1500 together with the light transmitting portion. Can be divided into.

In the first embodiment, the case where only one end of the tubular member 1200 is rotatably fitted to the introduction cylinder 83 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and both ends of the tubular member 1200 are not necessarily limited to this. It may be formed in a manner of axially supporting. In this case, in order to stabilize the rotation axis of the tubular member 1200, the force applied to the tubular member 1200 is effectively directed in the rotation direction. Therefore, the force required to rotate the tubular member 1200 can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, the case where the low transmittance portion 1230 of the tubular member 1200 and the low transmittance portion 1511 of the decorative member 1500 are formed overhanging is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the tubular member is tubular. The surfaces of the main body 1220 of the member 1200 and the main body 1510 of the decorative member 1500 may be formed in a stepless manner. In this case, a portion having a low light transmittance can be partially formed by applying a ground glass-like surface treatment or coating to the portions corresponding to the low transmittance portions 1230 and 1511. Then, for example, when the tubular member 1200 or the decorative member 1500 is formed from a resin material, even if there is a request to change the formation pattern of the low transmittance portions 1230 and 1511, if the shape of the member remains the same, The same mold can be used as it is to produce a tubular member 1200 or a decorative member 1500, and then surface processing or painting can be performed. Therefore, the production cost of the member can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the low transmittance portion 1511 of the decorative member 1500 is formed in a wavy shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the low transmittance portion 1511 is formed in a linear shape. Is also good. In this case, the light visually recognized in the mode of being moved in the axial direction of the tubular member 1200 by the rotation of the tubular member 1200 is visually recognized in the mode of being moved in the extending direction of the low transmittance portion 1511. Can be done.

In the first embodiment, the case where the tubular member 1200 is rotated by the weight of the sphere has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a drive source for rotating the tubular member 1200 is separately arranged. Is also good. In this case, for example, when the tubular member 1200 is rotated in such a manner that the descending speed of the low transmittance portion 1230 of the tubular member 1200 in the front view is faster than the flow velocity due to the own weight of the sphere, the sphere becomes a cylinder. It is pushed from above by the low transmittance portion 1230 of the shape member 1200. Then, the ball is accelerated as compared with the case where the ball flows down by its own weight, and the speed of the ball discharged from the lower end of the tubular member 1200 is increased. Here, since the player has the impression of a windmill that is rotated by the flow of the ball, there is a prejudice that the flow speed of the ball decreases when the ball comes into contact with a rotatable member. Therefore, the tubular member 1200 accelerates the speed of the ball, which can give the player an unexpected impression.

In the first embodiment, the case where the low transmittance portions 1511 are formed in a wavy shape in a plurality of rows has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the low transmittance portions 1511 are formed in a plurality of rows in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. It may be formed and formed in a grid pattern. In this case, the light can be further subdivided as compared with the case where the low transmittance portion 1511 is formed in a plurality of rows in a wavy shape (striped shape).

In the first embodiment, the case where the tubular member 1200 is fitted onto the introduction cylinder 83 fixed to the outer wall portion 82 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the tubular member 1200 is placed in the horizontal direction. It may be formed in a manner of being translated. In this case, even if the light irradiation device 1400 is fixed so as not to be movable, the relative positional relationship between the tubular member 1200 and the light irradiation device 1400 can be changed. That is, in the front view, the positional relationship between the tubular member 1200 and the output direction of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 1400 can be changed, and the strongly illuminated position of the tubular member 1200 can be horizontally moved. Therefore, the appearance visually recognized through the tubular member 1200 can be changed.

In the second embodiment, the case where the light irradiation device 2400 is swung by the collision of a sphere with the base portion 2410 of the light irradiation device 2400 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the light irradiation device is not necessarily limited to this. A drive source for swinging the 2400 may be separately arranged. In this case, since the light irradiation device 2400 can be swung regardless of whether or not the ball flows down, the player is interested even before the ball flows down in the vicinity of the light effect device 2000. It is possible to make the player aim the ball near the light effect device 2000.

In the third embodiment, the case where the low transmittance portion 3230 does not change the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the extension direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the low transmittance portion 3230 is oriented in the extension direction. It may be formed in such a manner that the widthwise dimension of the vertical cross-sectional shape periodically increases or decreases. In this case, when the tubular member 3200 is visually recognized in the front view, the low transmittance portion 3230 is visually recognized in such a manner that it becomes thicker or thinner along the extending direction, and the peripheral surface portion 3240 is also visually recognized as the low transmittance portion. It is visually recognized in a manner of becoming thicker or thinner along the extending direction of 3230. Therefore, the outer shape of the light visually recognized through the peripheral surface portion 3240 is also visually recognized in a manner of increasing or decreasing. Therefore, when the tubular member 3200 is rotated, the outer shape of the light visually recognized through the peripheral surface portion 3240 can be enlarged or reduced.

In the third embodiment, the case where the low transmittance portion 3230 is formed at a constant inclination angle with respect to the axis of the tubular member 3200 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the low transmittance portion 3230 is used. The tubular member 3200 may be formed so as to be extended while changing the inclination angle with respect to the axis. In this case, since the low transmittance portion 3230 is formed in a wavy shape in the front view of the tubular member 3200, when the tubular member 3200 is rotated, the light visually recognized through the tubular member 3200 is in the axial direction. It is visually recognized as being moved while moving up and down.

In the third embodiment, the case where the low transmittance portion 3230 is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the axial center of the tubular member 3200 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the low transmittance portion 3230 is the same. When the widthwise dimension of the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the extending direction is formed in a manner that periodically increases or decreases, the low transmittance portion 3230 may be formed in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member 3200. In this case, by rotating the tubular member 3200, the thickly formed portion and the thinly formed portion of the low transmittance portion 3230 are moved in the horizontal direction, and the outer shape of the light visually recognized through the peripheral surface portion 3240. Is visually recognized in a manner of increasing or decreasing. Therefore, when the tubular member 3200 is rotated, the outer shape of the light visually recognized through the peripheral surface portion 3240 can be enlarged or reduced.

In the third embodiment, the case where the low transmittance portion 3230 is formed overhanging the outer peripheral surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the groove formed on the outer peripheral surface in a semicircular shape. May be formed. In this case, the side surface of the tubular member 3200 including the groove recess is partially formed in a concave shape. Due to the action of the concave surface shape, the light is diffused and the groove portion is visually recognized darker than other peripheral surfaces, so that the light can be divided by the groove.

In the fourth embodiment, a mask is applied to the main body portion 4220 by attaching a tape to a portion other than the shape of the outer peripheral side low transmittance portion 4230, a paint having a low transmittance is sprayed, and the tape is applied after the paint has dried. Although the case where the outer peripheral side low transmittance portion 4230 is formed by peeling off is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the outer peripheral side low transmittance portion 4230 may be formed in a ground glass shape. In this case, when the main body portion 4220 of the tubular member 4200 is resin-molded, the outer peripheral side low transmittance portion 4230 can be formed at the same time, and the step of painting can be reduced. Therefore, the main body of the tubular member 4200 can be reduced. The production cost of the part 4220 can be suppressed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<An example of a technical idea that changes the pattern of light by rotating a tubular member>
A tubular member that is rotatably supported by a game board and has a light transmitting portion, and a light irradiating device that irradiates light toward the tubular member, and the tubular member has a light transmittance. A low transmittance portion that is formed on the peripheral surface of the tubular member and is formed in such a manner that the position visually recognized in one direction is changed by rotating the tubular member. A0 is characterized in that the light emitted from the light irradiating device is visually recognized through the tubular member.

According to the game machine A0, the pattern formed by the difference in the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member can be changed, and the effect of producing the light emitted from the light irradiating device can be improved. it can.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a diffusion member arranged on the game board and a light irradiation device arranged on the back side of the diffusion member are provided, and the light emitted from the light irradiation device is emitted. There is a gaming machine that is diffused by a diffusion member and illuminates a decorative member arranged on the front side of the diffusion member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-113910). However, in the conventional game machine described above, the mode in which the light emitted from the light irradiation device is visually recognized by the player is limited. That is, for example, the position where the diffusing member is illuminated is determined by the position of the light source of the light irradiation device, and the position where the diffusing member is illuminated (light pattern) does not change no matter how much the light emitting state of the light source is changed. Therefore, the mode of light visually recognized by the player is limited, and there is a problem that the effect of the light emitted from the light irradiation device is limited.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A0, the position of the low transmittance portion in one-way view is changed by rotating the tubular member. Therefore, the rotation of the tubular member changes the distribution of the degree of brightness of the light emitted from the light irradiator, which is visually recognized through the tubular member in one-way view. That is, since the pattern formed by the difference in the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member can be changedly formed, it is possible to increase the mode of producing the light emitted from the light irradiating device.

The fact that the tubular member has a light transmitting portion means that the tubular member has a portion that transmits light at least in a part. In this sense, the mode of the tubular member is not particularly limited. For example, the tubular member itself may be formed of a light-transmitting material, or the tubular member shields light from the light-transmitting material. It may be formed from the material to be used.

Examples of the material for forming the tubular member include glass and resin materials. For example, when a resin material is selected, a tubular member having the same shape can be mass-produced by manufacturing a molding die.

As an aspect of the low transmittance portion formed on the peripheral surface of the tubular member, when the transmittance is reduced by increasing the thickness on the peripheral surface of the tubular member, a curved surface is formed on the peripheral surface of the tubular member. Or concave surface is formed to reduce the transmittance by diffusing light, the peripheral surface of the tubular member is colored (for example, colored black) to reduce the transmittance, or surface processing (grooving, An example is a case where the transmittance is lowered by scattering light by (texturing, etc.).

It should be noted that maintaining the degree of brightness of the light means that the light transmitted through the member reaches the player's eyes sufficiently so that the brightness is not excessively impaired. When the degree is weakened, it means that the light transmitted through the member hardly reaches the eyes and is visually recognized in the dark.

In the game machine A0, the low transmittance portion is formed in a band shape inclined with respect to the axial center of the tubular member.

According to the game machine A1, in addition to the effect of the game machine A0, the low transmittance portion is formed in a band shape inclined with respect to the axial center of the tubular member. Therefore, for example, in front view, the tubular member Can be visually recognized by the player so that the low transmittance portion is moved in the axial direction by rotating. That is, the portion where the degree of light brightness is weakened (the portion where the low transmittance portion is formed) can be visually recognized as being moved in the axial direction, and at the same time, the portion where the degree of light brightness is weakened. It is possible to visually recognize the portion other than the peripheral surface portion where the degree of brightness of light is maintained so as to be moved in the axial direction. That is, since the player can visually recognize the light emitted to the tubular member so as to be moved in the axial direction of the tubular member without controlling the light source of the light irradiation device, the effect of the light irradiation device is produced. Can be improved.

For example, when the low transmittance portion is spirally formed on the peripheral surface of the tubular member, the light emitted to the tubular member is continuously moved in the same axial direction of the tubular member. Can be done. Further, by partially changing the inclination angle of the low transmittance portion, the moving speed of light can be partially changed even when the tubular member is rotated at the same speed.

Here, the inclination angle of the low transmittance portion of the tubular member means, for example, the angle formed by the axial center of the tubular member and the low transmittance portion that intersects the axial center in front view.

In the game machine A1, the low transmittance portion disposed on one side surface of the tubular member on the side close to the light irradiation device and the side surface opposite to the one side surface of the tubular member. When the low transmittance portion arranged on the other side surface is visually recognized from the opposite side of the light irradiation device with the tubular member sandwiched at least, the tubular member can be visually recognized in an intersected manner. A game machine A2 characterized in that it is formed in.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the light emitted from the light irradiation device to the tubular member can be subdivided.

The light emitted from the light irradiator to the tubular member is first divided by a low transmittance portion formed on one side surface, and then divided by a low transmittance portion formed on the other side surface. That is, the light is split on both one side and the other side. Therefore, the light emitted from the light irradiating device to the tubular member can be subdivided, and the number of lights visible through the tubular member can be increased without increasing the light source of the light irradiating device.

Here, the division of light is visually recognized in such a manner that the portion where the degree of brightness of light is maintained is divided at the low transmittance portion which is the portion where the degree of brightness of light is weakened. Means that.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the game machine A3 is characterized in that the low transmittance portion is formed in a spiral shape.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1 or A2, the low transmittance portion is formed in a spiral shape. Therefore, for example, in front view, the low transmittance portion is formed by rotating the tubular member. Can be visually recognized by the player so that is continuously moved in the same axial direction.

For example, in the case where low transmittance portions are formed up to both ends of the tubular member, if both ends of the tubular member are hidden invisible, it is as if one of the hidden both ends. It is possible to produce an effect in which light is generated from an end portion and moves to the other end portion, which is the opposite end portion.

In any of the game machines A1 to A3, the low transmittance portion is formed so as to project from the peripheral surface of the tubular member in the radial direction of the tubular member and extends along the peripheral surface of the tubular member. In a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the extending direction of the tubular member, at least one side surface of both side surfaces connected to the peripheral surface of the tubular member has a curved surface shape recessed toward the peripheral surface side of the tubular member. A game machine A4 characterized by being formed.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A3, the brightness of the light passing through the tubular member is suppressed while suppressing the increase in the material cost required for forming the low transmittance portion. It is possible to emphasize the change in the strength of the degree of.

Here, when the light transmittance is lowered by increasing the thickness of the peripheral surface of the tubular member, a considerable thickness is required for the low transmittance portion in order to adjust the intensity of the light with other parts. , The material cost of the tubular member increases.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A3, the side surface of the low transmittance portion is formed in a curved surface shape recessed toward the peripheral surface side of the tubular member. That is, a concave shape is formed at the intersection of the side surface of the low transmittance portion and the peripheral surface of the tubular member, and the light incident on the side surface of the low transmittance portion is diffused by the action of the concave surface shape. Therefore, even if the low transmittance portion is not provided with a considerable thickness, the light emitted to the side surface of the low transmittance portion is diffused, and the light is visually recognized in a state in which the degree of brightness of the light is weakened. As a result, the degree of light brightness is changed between the light that is visually recognized by passing through the concave side surface of the low transmittance portion and the light that is visually recognized by passing through the other portion, and the brightness of the light is changed. The strength of the degree of can be emphasized. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the effect of forming strength and weakness in the brightness of the light passing through the tubular member while suppressing the increase in the material cost.

In the game machine A4, the low transmittance portion is provided with an overhanging end at an overhanging end, and both side surfaces are connected via the overhanging end portion and both side surfaces are recessed toward the peripheral surface side of the tubular member. A game machine A5 characterized in that it is formed in a curved surface shape.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the effect of subdividing the irradiated light can be improved. That is, the light passing through both side surfaces of the low transmittance portion is diffused by the action of the concave surface shape, and the degree of brightness of the visible light is weakened, while the light passing through the overhanging end portion connecting both side surfaces. Maintains the brightness of the visible light.

In this case, a plurality of parts (both sides) that are visually recognized in a state where the degree of light brightness is weakened can be independently formed in one low transmittance part, and as a result, the light brightness can be reduced. It is possible to increase the number of parts that are visually recognized as parts with a strong degree. That is, among the low transmittance parts, the overhanging end part can be a part where the degree of light brightness is stronger than that of both side surfaces, thereby improving the effect of subdividing the irradiated light. Can be done.

In any of the game machines A0 to A5, the low transmittance portion is formed in a spiral shape, and the tubular member includes a peripheral surface portion formed between adjacent low transmittance portions, and the peripheral surface portion thereof. A game machine A6 characterized in that a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the circumferential direction is formed into a concave shape.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A0 to A5, it is possible to easily determine the boundary of the light divided by the low transmittance portion.

Here, even if the peripheral surface portion sandwiched between the adjacent low transmittance portions is not formed in a concave shape, the light emitted from the light irradiating device is visually recognized through the low transmittance portion, so that the light is divided. Will be done. However, in this case, since the light emitted from the light irradiating device is visually recognized as if the pattern of the light is cut as it is, it is difficult to visually recognize the light as being independent of each other.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A6, when the light emitted from the light irradiation device is visually recognized through the tubular member, the light is formed between the adjacent low transmittance portions due to the action of the concave surface portion of the peripheral surface portion. It is visually recognized in a reduced manner on the peripheral surface. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the low transmittance portion and the peripheral surface portion of the tubular member adjacent to the low transmittance portion in a state where the light is focused toward the inside of the peripheral surface portion. It is possible to easily determine the boundary of the divided light.

The portion surrounded by the low transmittance portion means, for example, a portion surrounded by the low transmittance portion on the front side and the low transmittance portion on the back side of the tubular member in front view.

In any of the game machines A3 to A6, the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis expands as the tubular member approaches from one end to the other end, which is the opposite end of one end. A game machine A7 characterized in that it is formed in a diameterd manner.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A3 to A6, the tubular member is formed in a manner in which the diameter is increased as it approaches the other end, for example. The area of the portion surrounded by the low transmittance portion in the front view is larger on the other end side than on the one end side. Therefore, for example, when the light is visually recognized to be moved from one end of the tubular member to the other end by rotating the tubular member, it is surrounded by a low transmittance portion. The light that is subdivided into the divided areas and visually recognized is visually recognized in a gradually enlarged manner. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect of enlarging or reducing the light without controlling the light source of the light irradiation device.

In any of the game machines A0 to A6, the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member is formed with an elliptical outer circumference, and the thickness of the elliptical wall surface is from the end in the major axis direction to the minor axis direction. A game machine A8 characterized in that it is suppressed toward the end of the game.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A0 to A6, the tubular member is formed in an elliptical shape, and the thickness of the elliptical wall surface is from the end in the major axis direction to the minor axis direction. Since it is suppressed toward the end, a convex lens shape is formed at both ends in the major axis direction of the tubular member. Therefore, when light is irradiated from the major axis direction of the tubular member, the light is focused near the axial center of the tubular member. Therefore, when light is emitted from the major axis direction of the tubular member, the pattern of light that is visually recognized through the tubular member from the opposite side of the light source that irradiates the light across the tubular member is the axial center of the tubular member. It can be focused in the vicinity.

In the game machine A8, the relationship between the major axis direction and the minor axis direction in the elliptical cross section of the tubular member is maintained up to a position of a predetermined distance from one end of the tubular member, and from the one end. The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that it is inverted on the other end side beyond the position of a predetermined distance.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of the game machine A8, the change in the degree of light collection near the axis of the tubular member is reversed at a position at a predetermined distance from one end of the tubular member. be able to.

That is, with respect to a predetermined distance from one end of the tubular member, a change in the outer shape of the tubular member in front view, for example, between one end side of the tubular member and the other end side of the tubular member. Is reversed. For example, when the direction of the tubular member that matches the direction of the player's line of sight on one end side of the tubular member is changed from the major axis direction to the minor axis direction, the other end of the tubular member On the side, the direction of the tubular member that matches the direction of the player's line of sight is changed from the minor axis direction to the major axis direction.

Therefore, the change in the degree to which the light is focused near the axial center of the tubular member can be reversed at a predetermined distance from one end of the tubular member, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

<An example of the technical idea of tilting the output direction of the light source in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member>
In any of the game machines A0 to A9, the output direction or the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light irradiation device is mutably formed in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member. Game machine B1.

According to the game machine B1, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A0 to A9, the effect of the tubular member is produced by changing the light output direction or the traveling direction in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member. The effect can be improved.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a diffusion member arranged on the game board and a light irradiation device arranged on the back side of the diffusion member are provided, and the light emitted from the light irradiation device is emitted. There is a gaming machine that is diffused by a diffusion member and illuminates a decorative member arranged on the front side of the diffusion member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-113910). However, in the conventional game machine described above, the mode in which the light emitted from the light irradiation device is visually recognized by the player is limited. That is, for example, the position where the diffusing member is illuminated is determined by the position of the light source of the light irradiation device, and the position where the diffusing member is illuminated (light pattern) does not change no matter how much the light emitting state of the light source is changed. Therefore, the mode of light visually recognized by the player is limited, and there is a problem that the effect of the light emitted from the light irradiation device is limited.

Therefore, the applicant of the present application has arranged a tubular member on the front side of the light irradiation device in addition to the above-mentioned gaming machine, and a pattern is formed by the difference in the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member. , A gaming machine has been developed in which the visible pattern is changed by the rotation of the tubular member, and the way the tubular member shines is changed (not known at the time of filing the application of the present application). However, in this case, for example, when the output direction of the light emitted from the light irradiating device is formed to be constant, the light of the pattern formed by the difference in the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member. It is not possible to significantly change the position or range in which the degree of brightness is strongly visible or the position or range in which the degree of brightness is weakly visible. Therefore, there is a problem that the mode of producing the tubular member is limited.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A0 to A9, the output direction or the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light irradiation device is perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member. Since it is formed so as to be changeable on a flat surface, it is possible to change the position where the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member is most strongly recognized, for example, along the direction perpendicular to the axis in the front view. Therefore, even when the output direction of the light emitted from the light irradiation device is formed to be constant, the brightness of the light is formed by the difference in the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member. The position or range in which the degree of lightness is strongly visually recognized or the position or range in which the degree of lightness is weakly visually recognized can be greatly changed, and the mode of effect of the tubular member can be increased.

The output direction of light means the direction in which the luminous intensity of light is the strongest before the irradiated light is bent by refraction or the like, and the traveling direction of light is the direction in which the luminous intensity of the irradiated light is strongest. Means the direction in which light travels while being bent by refraction or the like.

In the game machine B1, the game machine B2 is characterized in that the low transmittance portion is formed in a spiral shape.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the light emitted from the light irradiation device to the tubular member is moved in the axial direction of the tubular member by rotating the tubular member. Since it can be visually recognized by the player, the action of moving the light in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member and the ability to visually recognize the player so that the light is moved in the axial direction of the tubular member. Due to the synergistic effect of, the player can visually recognize the light as if it were moved up, down, left and right.

In the game machine B1 or B2, the light irradiation device includes a plurality of light sources for irradiating light and a base portion to which the plurality of light sources are fixed, and the base portion can swing with respect to the tubular member. A game machine B3 characterized in that it is formed in.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, the change in the posture of the member that moves the light in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member can be minimized.

That is, when another member for changing the traveling direction of light is arranged between the light irradiation device and the tubular member and the posture of the other member is changed to change the traveling direction of light, the other member is light. Since it is arranged closer to the tubular member than the irradiation device, it is necessary to change the posture of another member at a swing angle larger than the swing angle that directly changes the light output direction of the light source.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, the base portion to which the light source of the light irradiation device is fixed is formed so as to be swingable, so that the tubular member and the traveling direction of the light ( Alternatively, a sufficient distance can be taken from the position where the output direction is changed. Therefore, it is possible to secure the moving distance of the light tubular member in the direction perpendicular to the axis while suppressing the swing angle of the base portion.

The game machine B1 or B2 includes a refracting member formed between the tubular member and the light irradiating device so as to be able to refract the light emitted from the light irradiating device toward the tubular member. The irradiating device includes a plurality of light sources for irradiating light and a base portion to which the plurality of light sources are fixed, and the refraction member is arranged on the tubular member side of the plurality of light sources and described above. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that it is formed so as to be swingable in a direction perpendicular to an axis of a tubular member.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, the refracting members arranged in the plurality of light sources of the light irradiation device are formed so as to be swingable, so that the light irradiation device emits light. The traveling direction of light can be changed by swinging the refracting member. In this case, since the refracting members are individually arranged, it is possible to arbitrarily select which refracting member to swing depending on the design of the refracting member. That is, since it is possible to select from which light source the traveling direction of the light emitted is changed, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in producing the light of the light irradiation device.

For example, when a plurality of light sources of a light irradiation device are arranged along the axial direction of a tubular member, if all the light sources are swung in the same direction at the same angle, the degree of light brightness is the highest. The strongly visible area is translated in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member. Further, for example, when a plurality of light sources of the light irradiation device are arranged along the axial direction of the tubular member, if the adjacent light sources are swung in the opposite directions, the degree of brightness of the light is the highest. The strongly visible region is formed so as to be visually recognized in the shape of an S-shaped curve.

In the game machine B4, the tubular member has a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axial center, and the distance from the axial center is shorter than the distance from the axial center of the tubular member to the refracting member. It is formed in an elliptical shape having a major axis having a diameter longer than the radial direction, and by directing the major axis direction toward the refracting member, the tubular member and the refracting member are brought into contact with each other, and the refracting member swings. A game machine B5 characterized in that it can be formed as possible.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, when the tubular member is rotated and the refracting member is directed in the minor axis direction, the refracting member and the minor axis direction are separated from each other, so that the refracting member exerts a force. The refracting member remains stationary without being affected. On the other hand, when the refracting member is oriented in the major axis direction, the refracting member and the major axis direction are brought into contact with each other, so that the refracting member is swung. Therefore, the rotation of the tubular member is used to change the pattern formed by the intensity of the brightness of the light visually recognized on the peripheral surface of the tubular member, and the refraction member is swung to change the traveling direction of the light. It can also be used for changing purposes.

Examples of the shape of the tubular member having the minor axis direction and the major axis direction include an elliptical shape, a star shape, a keyhole shape, and a long rod shape.

In any of the game machines B1 to B5, the drive source required to change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light irradiating device is the kinetic energy of the ball flowing down the game board. Machine B6.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B5, it is not necessary to dispose a drive source for changing the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light irradiation device. The number of arrangements can be suppressed.

As a mode of changing the traveling direction of light by the kinetic energy of the sphere, the light irradiating device is shaken by the sphere directly colliding with the light irradiating device, or the sphere is a member other than the light irradiating device. When a sphere collides with a certain tubular member and the kinetic energy of the sphere acts indirectly on the change in the traveling direction of the light by changing the traveling direction of the light of the light irradiation device by rotating the tubular member. Examples thereof include a case where a tubular member collided with a sphere comes into contact with a refracting member that refracts light and changes the posture of the refracting member.

<An example of the technical idea of rotating a tubular member with the kinetic energy of a sphere>
In any one of the game machines A0 to A9 and B1 to B6, the tubular member is rotated by transmitting the kinetic energy of a ball flowing down the game board.

According to the game machine C1, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A0 to A9 and B1 to B6, it is not necessary to separately prepare a drive source for driving the tubular member, so that the drive for rotating the tubular member is not required. The power cost required to operate the source (eg, drive motor) can be reduced.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a diffusion member arranged on the game board and a light irradiation device arranged on the back side of the diffusion member are provided, and the light emitted from the light irradiation device is emitted. There is a gaming machine that is diffused by a diffusion member and illuminates a decorative member arranged on the front side of the diffusion member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-113910). However, in the conventional game machine described above, the mode in which the light emitted from the light irradiation device is visually recognized by the player is limited. That is, for example, the position where the diffusing member is illuminated is determined by the position of the light source of the light irradiation device, and the position where the diffusing member is illuminated (light pattern) does not change no matter how much the light emitting state of the light source is changed. Therefore, the mode of light visually recognized by the player is limited, and there is a problem that the effect of the light emitted from the light irradiation device is limited.

Therefore, the applicant of the present application has arranged a tubular member on the front side of the light irradiation device in addition to the above-mentioned gaming machine, and a pattern is formed by the difference in the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member. , A gaming machine has been developed in which the visible pattern is changed by the rotation of the tubular member, and the way the tubular member shines is changed (not known at the time of filing the application of the present application). However, for example, in the case of a structure in which a tubular member is rotated by a drive motor, there is a problem that the power cost of the drive motor that rotates the tubular member is extra.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the tubular member is rotated by the kinetic energy of the ball flowing down the game board. Therefore, since a drive motor for rotating the tubular member is not required, the power cost required for rotating the tubular member can be reduced.

Further, the tubular member can be installed in a space-saving manner because the drive motor is not arranged. That is, the space for arranging the accessory such as the tubular member on the front side of the game board or the back side of the game board is limited to a certain range, but the drive motor for rotating the tubular member does not need to be arranged. The usable space can be utilized as a space for arranging other moving accessories. Therefore, the degree of freedom in disposing of other moving accessories can be improved.

In a mode in which the tubular member is rotated by the kinetic energy of the sphere, a portion extending in the radial direction is formed on the side surface of the tubular member, and the overhanging portion is pushed by the flowing ball to rotate the tubular member. And a mode in which the tubular member is rotated by the collision of a sphere with the tubular member.

The game machine C1 includes a guide member that allows the ball to flow down along a predetermined path along the side surface of the tubular member, and the low transmittance portion projects in a band shape on the side surface on the side where the ball is flown down by the guide member. The gaming machine C2 is formed in a spiral shape along the peripheral surface of the tubular member and is formed at a position where it comes into contact with a ball flowing down by the guide member.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, a ball flowing down along a guide member in a predetermined path comes into contact with the low transmittance portion of the tubular member, and the ball pushes the low transmittance portion. In the embodiment, the tubular member is rotated. Therefore, since the force is continuously applied from the sphere to the tubular member while the sphere flows down, the tubular member can be continuously rotated, and the effect of the light irradiation device can be improved.

In the game machine C2, the low transmittance portion has a bent portion in which the magnitude of the inclination angle with respect to the axial center of the tubular member is changed.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the rotation speed of the tubular member can be changed with the bent portion as a boundary.

Here, when the tubular member is rotated by pushing the low transmittance portion of the tubular member by the sphere, the tubular member is rotated by the weight of the sphere, so that the sphere gives the tubular member to the tubular member. The force applied is less likely to fluctuate, and the rotational speed of the tubular member is likely to be kept constant. Therefore, the effect of rotating the tubular member tends to be monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C3, since the inclination angle of the low transmission rate portion of the tubular member is changed at the bent portion, the ball is a cylinder before and after the change of the inclination angle of the low transmission rate portion. Since the rotation angle of the tubular member is different when the outer peripheral surface of the shaped member flows down a predetermined distance in the axial direction, if the flow speed of the sphere is the same, before and after the inclination angle of the low transmission rate portion changes. Then, the rotation speed of the tubular member is changed. For example, when the flow speeds of the spheres in the vertical direction are the same, the rotation speed of the tubular member decreases as the inclination angle of the low transmittance portion decreases.

Therefore, the rotation speed of the tubular member can be changed even when the speed change of the sphere is unlikely to occur because the tubular member is rotated by the weight of the sphere to be abutted. Thereby, the rotation speed of the tubular member that can be formed can be increased.

In addition, even in a situation where the position of the flowing sphere is difficult to see, the change in the rotational speed of the tubular member can be confirmed by associating the position of the flowing sphere with the timing of the change in the rotational speed of the tubular member. You can check the position where the ball is flowing down with. For example, if the low transmittance portion is formed in such a manner that the inclination angle of the low transmittance portion is changed immediately before the sphere is discharged from the tubular member, when does the rotation speed of the tubular member change? By checking, it is possible to confirm the timing at which the ball is discharged from the end of the tubular member.

In the game machine C2 or C3, the game machine C4 is characterized in that the guide member is deformably formed in a direction away from the tubular member.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2 or C3, when the tubular member temporarily becomes non-rotatable for some reason, even if the ball does not flow down and is stopped, the guide member By being deformed in the direction away from the tubular member, the flow of the ball is restarted, and the game can be continuously performed accordingly.

That is, if the tubular member becomes non-rotatable for some reason, the ball flowing down along the guide member is stopped by being brought into contact with the low transmittance portion, so that the ball does not flow down and the game can be continued. It becomes difficult.

Normally, it is necessary to stop the game here and repair the game machine. However, when the spheres are further guided by the guide member, a large load is applied to the guide member due to the accumulation of a plurality of spheres on the guide member. Then, the guide member is deformed in the direction away from the tubular member, the distance between the side surface of the tubular member and the guide member is secured, the sphere is dropped from between the low transmittance portion and the guide member, and the flow of the sphere is restarted. Therefore, the game can be continued.

Examples of the case where the guide member can be deformed by an overload include a case where the guide member is made of elastic rubber and a case where the guide member is made of a thin metal plate.

In any of the game machines C2 to C4, the tubular member of the tubular member in which the guide member passes through the axis of the tubular member and intersects a plane orthogonal to the output direction of light emitted from the light irradiation device. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that it is arranged so as to face at least one side surface of the pair of side surface portions.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C2 to C4, the guide member is arranged at a position separated from the output direction of the light emitted from the light irradiation device, so that the light irradiation is performed. It is possible to reduce the influence of the light emitted from the device being shielded by the guide member and the sphere flowing down along the guide member.

Here, for example, when the light emitted from the light irradiation device is emitted at a position deviated from the axial center of the tubular member, the distances between each of the pair of side surface portions and the light output direction are different. However, since the guide member is arranged so as to face the side surface portion that is farther away from the light output direction, the light emitted from the light irradiation device flows down along the guide member and the guide member. The effect of shading by the sphere can be reduced.

Further, for example, when a low transmittance portion is formed on the outer peripheral side of the tubular member and a guide member is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the tubular member, the guide member is provided on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member. Since it is not necessary to dispose of the light, it is possible to further reduce the influence of the light emitted from the light irradiating device toward the tubular member in the front view being shielded by the guide member and the sphere flowing down along the guide member.

In the game machine C1, the tubular member includes a transmission portion formed so as to project from a peripheral surface and at a position where a flowing ball can collide, and the transmission portion is a surface on which the flowing ball collides. The gaming machine C6 is characterized by having a collision surface formed so as to be inclined with respect to the axial center of the tubular member.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the collision surface of the transmission portion collided with the ball is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the axial center of the tubular member, so that the ball is formed in the transmission portion. The force generated at the time of collision can be effectively applied in the rotation direction of the tubular member.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a diffusion member arranged on the game board and a light irradiation device arranged on the back side of the diffusion member are provided, and the light emitted from the light irradiation device is emitted. There is a gaming machine that is diffused by a diffusion member and illuminates a decorative member arranged on the front side of the diffusion member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-113910). However, in the conventional game machine described above, the mode in which the light emitted from the light irradiation device is visually recognized by the player is limited. That is, for example, the position where the diffusing member is illuminated is determined by the position of the light source of the light irradiation device, and the position where the diffusing member is illuminated (light pattern) does not change no matter how much the light emitting state of the light source is changed. Therefore, the mode of light visually recognized by the player is limited, and there is a problem that the effect of the light emitted from the light irradiation device is limited.

Therefore, the applicant of the present application has arranged a tubular member on the front side of the light irradiation device in addition to the above-mentioned gaming machine, and a pattern is formed by the difference in the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member. , A gaming machine has been developed in which the visible pattern is changed by the rotation of the tubular member, and the way the tubular member shines is changed (not known at the time of filing the application of the present application). However, in this case, for example, when the strip-shaped overhang portion formed on the side surface of the tubular member is abutted against the flowing sphere and is formed by the mechanism of being rotated by the own weight of the sphere, the sphere is formed of the tubular member. The flow speed is suppressed (decelerated) by abutting against the strip-shaped overhanging portion formed on the side surface, and after that, the weight of the ball and the tubular shape do not depend on the flow speed of the ball when it reaches the tubular member. Due to the suspension relationship with the friction in the rotational direction of the member, the sphere flows down at a substantially constant velocity. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to greatly change the rotation speed of the tubular member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, when the ball collides with the transmission part, kinetic energy of a different magnitude is transmitted to the tubular member through the transmission part depending on the speed of the flowing ball. Since the tubular member is rotated in the direction perpendicular to the axis by the kinetic energy, the speed at which the tubular member rotates can be changed by changing the speed of the flowing sphere.

In the game machine C6, a plurality of the transmission portions are formed, and the plurality of transmission portions exert a rotational force that causes the tubular member to rotate in one rotation direction by colliding with a flowing ball. A rotation in which the collision surface is formed in a manner generated in the member and a rotation in which the tubular member is rotated in the opposite direction of one rotation direction by being collided with a flowing sphere. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that at least one on which the collision surface is formed is arranged in a manner in which a force is generated on the tubular member.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, when the ball collides with the transmission portion, the tubular member is rotatably formed in one or the other direction. Therefore, it is possible to form the direction of change of the pattern formed by the intensity of the brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member in both directions.

It should be noted that the method of the collided surface is that the collided surface is formed in such a manner that the tubular member is generated by a rotational force that causes the tubular member to rotate in one direction of rotation by being collided with a flowing ball. It means that the collision surface is formed in such a manner that the normal line extending to the side facing the flowing sphere is directed in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation of one of the tubular members. To do.

Further, it is collided with the collided surface formed in such a manner that the tubular member generates a rotational force for rotating the tubular member in one direction of rotation by being collided with the flowing sphere, and the flowing sphere. As a result, the collision surface formed in a manner in which the tubular member is generated with a rotational force that causes the tubular member to rotate in the opposite direction of one rotation direction to the other rotation direction is formed in a single transmission portion. It may be formed.

In the game machine C6 or C7, the game machine C8 is characterized in that the transmission portion is formed on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of the game machine C6 or C7, the space required for the tubular member to rotate can be minimized.

Here, when the transmission portion is formed on the outer peripheral side of the tubular member, on the trajectory of the transmission portion formed when the tubular member rotates in order to avoid collision between the transmission portion of the tubular member and other members. It is necessary to form a space in. Therefore, the space for arranging the tubular member becomes large, and the space for arranging other accessories is suppressed accordingly.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6 or C7, a transmission portion for rotating the tubular member by the collision force of the ball is formed on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member. The space for arranging the shaped members is suppressed, and accordingly, a large space for arranging other accessories can be secured.

In any of the game machines C6 to C8, the transmission portion is a rotational force that causes the tubular member to rotate in one direction of rotation by colliding with a flowing ball in the vicinity of the side surface of the tubular member. Is formed on the tubular member, while at a position separated from the side surface of the tubular member, the tubular member is collided with a flowing ball in the direction opposite to one of the rotational directions. The gaming machine C9 is formed in such a manner that a rotational force for rotating in a certain other rotational direction is generated in the tubular member.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C6 to C8, the rotation speed and the rotation direction of the tubular member can be changed depending on where the ball collides with the transmission portion. As a result, the movement of the tubular member can be made more irregular.

The tubular member is rotated by the force applied when it collides with the sphere. Here, for example, when applying a force in the rotational direction to a rotatably formed tubular member, the tubular member is subjected to a position away from the axial center rather than a force applied to the tubular member at a position closer to the axial center. When a force is applied, the rotational torque applied to the tubular member becomes larger, and the rotational speed of the tubular member can be increased.

That is, for example, when the transmission portion is formed on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member, when a sphere collides with the transmission portion near the side surface of the tubular member, a large rotational torque is generated in the tubular member, and the tubular member is generated. Is rotated at a high speed in one direction of rotation. On the other hand, when the sphere collides with the transmission portion near the axis of the tubular member, the rotational torque generated in the tubular member becomes small, and the rotational speed at which the tubular member is rotated in the other rotation direction becomes small. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect of changing the rotation direction and rotation speed of the tubular member depending on the position at which the sphere collides with the transmission portion of the tubular member. Therefore, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the tubular member can be made irregular.

<An example of a technical idea that changes the direction of light movement depending on the pattern of the decorative member>
In any of the game machines A0 to A9, B1 to B6, or C1 to C9, a decorative member is provided which is arranged in a manner of shielding the tubular member and has a light transmitting portion, and the decorative member transmits light. A portion having low transmittance, which has a low transmittance portion which is formed in a plurality of rows and extends in a strip shape along a direction inclined with respect to the axial center of the tubular member, and is the tubular member. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the low transmittance portion is formed in a spiral shape along the peripheral surface of the tubular member.

According to the game machine D1, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A0 to A9, B1 to B6, or C1 to C9, the light emitted toward the tubular member is directed to the axial center of the tubular member. It can be visually recognized by the player in a mode of being moved in the inclined direction.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a diffusion member arranged on the game board and a light irradiation device arranged on the back side of the diffusion member are provided, and the light emitted from the light irradiation device is emitted. There is a gaming machine that is diffused by a diffusion member and illuminates a decorative member arranged on the front side of the diffusion member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-113910). However, in the conventional game machine described above, the mode in which the light emitted from the light irradiation device is visually recognized by the player is limited. That is, for example, the position where the diffusing member is illuminated is determined by the position of the light source of the light irradiation device, and the position where the diffusing member is illuminated (light pattern) does not change no matter how much the light emitting state of the light source is changed. Therefore, the mode of light visually recognized by the player is limited, and there is a problem that the effect of the light emitted from the light irradiation device is limited.

Therefore, the applicant of the present application has arranged a tubular member on the front side of the light irradiation device in addition to the above-mentioned gaming machine, and a pattern is formed by the difference in the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member. , A gaming machine has been developed in which the visible pattern is changed by the rotation of the tubular member, and the way the tubular member shines is changed (not known at the time of filing the application of the present application). However, in this case, it is suitable to visually recognize the light as if it is moved in the axial direction or the direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member, but for example, it is visually recognized that the light is moved in the direction inclined to the axial center. It had the problem that it was difficult to make it.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, a plurality of rows of low-transmittance portions are formed on the decorative member arranged in a manner of shielding the tubular member so as to be inclined to the axial center of the tubular member. Light that is visually recognized in a mode in which the low transmittance portion of the tubular member is moved in the axial direction of the tubular member due to the rotation of the member and is moved in the axial direction of the tubular member. It can be visually recognized by the player in a manner of being moved along the low transmittance portion of the decorative member.

Further, the low transmittance portion of the decorative member allows the light visually recognized through the decorative member to be divided into each low transmittance portion, and the light can be subdivided. As a result, the effect of producing the light emitted from the light irradiation device can be improved.

The low transmittance portion of the decorative member is partially roughened to scatter light to reduce the transmittance, is partially thickened, or is partially formed into a concave lens shape. Cases and the like are exemplified.

The fact that the decorative member has a light transmitting portion means that the decorative member has a portion that transmits light at least in a part. In this sense, the mode of the decorative member is not particularly limited, and for example, the decorative member itself may be formed of a light-transmitting material, and the decorative member includes a light-transmitting material and a material that shields light. May be formed from.

In the game machine D1, the cross-sectional shape of the decorative member in a plane perpendicular to the extending direction of the low transmittance portion of the decorative member is such that the low transmittance portions of the plurality of rows of the decorative member are adjacent to each other. A game machine D2 characterized in that it is formed in a concave shape between the transmittance portions.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the effect of subdividing the light by the adjacent low transmittance portions can be made remarkable.

Here, for example, as a method of changing the direction visually recognized as the direction in which light is moved from the axial direction of the tubular member to the direction inclined with respect to the axial center of the tubular member, the tubular member There is a method of shielding with a plate having an elongated hole-shaped opening inclined with respect to the axial direction of the above. However, in this case, since the light is diffracted near the boundary of the opening, the light visually recognized through the opening is wider than the area of the opening and is easily recognized. Therefore, for example, when a plurality of rows of elongated hole-shaped openings are formed, the distance between the close ends of the light visually recognized from the openings is narrower than the distance between the close ends of the adjacent openings. Therefore, it becomes difficult to determine the light boundary for each aperture.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D2, the cross-sectional shape between the adjacent low-transmittance portions of the decorative member is formed in a concave shape, so that the light visually recognized through the concave-shaped portion is affected by the concave shape. Therefore, it is visually recognized in a mode of being reduced in the direction of connecting the adjacent low transmittance portions. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine the boundary of the light divided by the low transmittance unit.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the decorative member is extended in a manner intersecting the low transmittance portion of the decorative member formed in a plurality of rows, and the width direction of the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the extending direction. D3 is a gaming machine D3, which is formed in such a manner that the dimension of the above is shortened as it approaches the overhanging end, and has a strip-shaped portion formed in a curved surface shape with both side surfaces in the width direction recessed toward the decorative member side.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, when the light moving along the low transmittance part crosses the band-shaped part, both side surfaces of the band-shaped part are recessed toward the decorative member side. Due to the action of the concave surface shape formed by being formed in a shape, the strip-shaped portion is reduced in the width direction and visually recognized. Therefore, the outer shape of the light to be moved can be reduced in the process of movement, or the reduced state can be returned to the original state to change the outer shape of the light.

In the game machine D3, the strip-shaped portion is formed on one side of the low-transmittance portion in the low-transmittance portion of at least one of the decorative members, and the formation position of the band upper portion and the one side thereof. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the formation position of the band-shaped portion formed on the other side, which is the opposite side, is shifted in the extending direction of the low transmittance portion.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, when the light is visually recognized in a mode of being moved along the low transmittance part, one of the width directions of one low transmittance part is obtained. While the outer shape of the light is reduced on the side, the outer shape of the light is maintained on the other side, which is the opposite side of the other side, so that the outer shape of the light changes on both sides in the width direction of one low transmittance portion. Is different, so that it is possible to easily determine the change in the outer shape of the light.

<An example of the technical idea of using the shadow of a sphere to produce light>
A game machine E1 characterized in that a ball flows down in any of the game machines A0 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C9, or D1 to D4 while blocking the light emitted from the light irradiating device.

According to the game machine E1, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A0 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C9, or D1 to D4, the light emitted from the light irradiation device is blocked by the sphere, so that it is visually recognized. The shadow of the sphere is generated in the light, and as a result, the shape of the visually recognized light can be changed.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a diffusion member arranged on the game board and a light irradiation device arranged on the back side of the diffusion member are provided, and the light emitted from the light irradiation device is emitted. There is a gaming machine that is diffused by a diffusion member and illuminates a decorative member arranged on the front side of the diffusion member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-113910). However, in the conventional game machine described above, the mode in which the light emitted from the light irradiation device is visually recognized by the player is limited. That is, for example, the position where the diffusing member is illuminated is determined by the position of the light source of the light irradiation device, and the position where the diffusing member is illuminated (light pattern) does not change no matter how much the light emitting state of the light source is changed. Therefore, the mode of light visually recognized by the player is limited, and there is a problem that the effect of the light emitted from the light irradiation device is limited.

Therefore, the applicant of the present application has arranged a tubular member on the front side of the light irradiation device in addition to the above-mentioned gaming machine, and a pattern is formed by the difference in the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member. , A gaming machine has been developed in which the visible pattern is changed by the rotation of the tubular member, and the way the tubular member shines is changed (not known at the time of filing the application of the present application). However, in this case, the shape of the light visually recognized through the tubular member depends on the shape of the tubular member, so that the pattern changes regularly depending on the intensity of the brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member. There was a problem that the effect of the production was limited.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since the flowing sphere blocks the light emitted by the light irradiating device, a shadow is cast on the light visually recognized at the flowing portion of the sphere, and the pattern of the visually recognized light is changed. be able to. In addition, the shadows created by the spheres blocking the light are visually recognized in various ways depending on the number of spheres flowing down and the position of the spheres flowing down, so it is possible to increase the types of patterns depending on the intensity of the brightness of the light. It is possible to improve the effect of production.

The game machine E2 is characterized in that a plurality of paths through which the ball flows down are formed in the game machine E1.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine E1, a plurality of routes through which the ball flows down are prepared. Therefore, it is possible to change the movement path of the shadow of the visually recognized sphere by changing the path through which the sphere flows.

The game machine E2 includes a decorative member which is arranged in a manner of shielding the tubular member and has a light transmitting portion, and the decorative member is inclined with respect to the axis of the tubular member to form a plurality of rows. The gaming machine E3 has a low transmittance portion which is a portion having low light transmittance, and the path can be formed on a side surface of the decorative member on the side of the tubular member.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the decorative member is used for both the purpose of dividing the light by the low transmittance portion and the use of changing the flow path of the ball. Therefore, the number of required members to be arranged can be reduced as compared with the case where the flow path of the sphere is changed by arranging a member different from the decorative member, so that the material cost and the assembly cost can be suppressed. it can.

In the game machine E3, the low transmittance portion of the tubular member projects outward in the radial direction of the tubular member to form a double helix, and a position where a ball flowing down in a predetermined path can come into contact with the tubular member. The tubular member is rotatably formed by abutting the sphere on the low transmittance portion of the tubular member, and the low transmittance portion formed in the double helix shape. When the sphere comes into contact with the spiral low transmittance portion on one side, the sphere flows down the path 1 formed on the decorative member, while the spiral low transmittance on the one side. When the sphere is brought into contact with the other spiral low transmittance portion different from the portion, the game is characterized in that the sphere flows down by a route different from the path 1 formed on the decorative member. Machine E4.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3, which position of the tubular member the ball abuts determines which of the plurality of paths the ball flows down. Can be changed to a plurality of flow paths after the sphere comes into contact with the tubular member while reaching the tubular member by a fixed path.

That is, for example, when a sphere is allowed to flow down along a plurality of paths formed in a decorative member, if it is necessary to prepare a member for guiding the sphere to each path, the number of necessary members increases. Further, when a sphere is branched into a plurality of paths from one path, it is necessary to dispose a branch path for branching the sphere in each path and a functional member such as a switch for changing the path in which the sphere flows down. As a result, material costs and assembly costs increase.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E4, even when the ball is guided to reach the tubular member by a certain path, the posture of the tubular member is changed by rotating the tubular member. , The location of the tubular member that comes into contact with the sphere is changed. As a result, the low transmittance portion of the tubular member with which the sphere is in contact is selected by one spiral low transmittance portion and the other spiral low transmittance portion, and the sphere is decorated accordingly. The flow path of the sphere is changed depending on whether it flows down one path formed on the member or another path. That is, it is possible to eliminate the need for a member that guides the sphere to each path while maintaining the effect of causing the sphere to flow down in a plurality of paths. Therefore, it is possible to change the flow path after the sphere comes into contact with the tubular member in a plurality of ways while reducing the material cost and the assembly cost.

A game machine F1 in any of game machines A0 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C9, D1 to D4, or E1 to E4, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and when the stop It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine F2, characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C9, D1 to D4, or E1 to E4. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C9, D1 to D4, or E1 to E4, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine F3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the above, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board 1200, 2200, 3200, 4200, 5200 Cylindrical member 1230, 2230, 3230 Low transmittance part 1232 Concave side surface part (both sides)
1231 Overhanging end 1240, 2240, 3240 Peripheral surface 1400, 2400, 4400 Light irradiation device 1410, 2410 Base 1420, 1421, 1423 Light source 1500, 2500 Decorative member 1511, 2511 Low transmittance part 1512, 2512 Band-shaped part 2233 Bent part 2531 Branch groove (path through which the ball flows down)
3300 Transmission unit 3310 First collision surface (collision surface)
3320 Second collision surface (collision surface)
4430 Refractive member M position

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a diffusion member arranged on a game board and a light irradiation device arranged on the back side of the diffusion member, and the light emitted from the light irradiation device is emitted by the diffusion member. There is known a gaming machine that is diffused and illuminates a decorative member arranged on the front side of the diffusion member (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-113910

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that the mode in which the light emitted from the light irradiation device is visually recognized by the player is limited.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the effect of producing an effect by the light emitted from the light irradiation device .

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 is formed on a light transmitting portion , a tubular portion, and the inside of the tubular portion, which are rotatably supported by a game board and have a predetermined thickness. A rotating member having a through path extending in a straight line direction and a light irradiating device for irradiating light toward the front of the game board are provided, and the rotating member is composed of a first light transmittance. is a partial, made form the peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion, and a first transmission unit for the rotating member is formed in a manner where the position is changed to be viewed in one direction as viewed by being rotated, the a second transmission portion that transmits light of the light irradiation device at a higher transmittance than the first transmittance portion provided with a kinetic energy of the game ball flowing down the game board is rotated by being transmitted The pattern of the light emitted from the light irradiating device transmitted through the second transmittance portion located on the front side of the flowing game ball can be changed, and the rotating member is a flowing game ball. Is provided with a collided portion formed at a position where the can collide, and the collided portion includes a surface on which the flowing game ball collides, and is arranged on the peripheral surface side of the tubular portion .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, it is possible to improve the effect of producing the effect by the light emitted from the light irradiation device .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the light effect device in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a light effect device. It is a partial cross-sectional view of an introduction cylinder, a tubular member and a guide member in an assembled state. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional views of a tubular member and a guide member, and (d) is a side view of the tubular member in the direction of arrow VIIId of FIG. 8 (b). It is a partial cross-sectional view of a tubular member viewed in cross section in a plane passing through the axial center of the tubular member. It is a front view of the light effect device in an assembled state. (A) to (c) are front views of the light effect device. (A) is a front view of the decorative member, (b) is a rear view of the decorative member, and (c) is a side view of the decorative member in the direction of arrow XIIc of FIG. 12 (a). (D) is a partial cross-sectional view of the decorative member in the line XIId-XIid of FIG. 12 (a), and (e) is a partial side view of the decorative member in the direction of arrow XIIe of FIG. 12 (a). It is a front view of the light production device. It is a schematic diagram which schematically illustrated the path of light. (A) to (c) are partially enlarged front views of the light effect device. (A) and (b) are front views of the light effect device. It is a front perspective view of the light effect device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of a tubular member. (A) is a front view of a tubular member and a light irradiation device, and (b) is a side view of the tubular member and a light irradiation device. (A) is a front view of a tubular member and a light irradiation device, and (b) is a side view of the tubular member and a light irradiation device. (A) is a top view of the light irradiation device, (b) is a front view of the light irradiation device, and (c) is a side view of the light irradiation device. (A) and (b) are top views of the tubular member and the light irradiation device, and (c) and (d) are front views of the tubular member and the light irradiation device. It is a development view of a tubular member. (A) is a front view of the decorative member, (b) is a rear view of the decorative member, and (c) is a top view of the decorative member. (A) to (c) are front views of a tubular member, a guide member, and a decorative member in an assembled state. (A) to (c) are front views of a tubular member, a guide member, and a decorative member in an assembled state. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged front views of decorative members. It is a front perspective view of the light effect device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a top view of the main body of the tubular member, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission portion in the line XXIXb-XXIXb of FIG. 29 (a), and FIG. 29 (c) is a sectional view of the transmission portion. It is sectional drawing of the transmission part in XXIXc-XXIXc line of). It is sectional drawing of the introduction cylinder and the tubular member. (A) to (c) are front views of the light effect device. It is a front perspective view of the light effect device in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a side view of a tubular member and a light irradiation device, and (b) and (c) are top views of a tubular member and a light irradiation device. (A) and (b) are top views of the base portion and the refraction member of the light irradiation device. It is a front view of a tubular member and a light irradiation apparatus. It is a front view of a tubular member and a light irradiation apparatus. (A) is a top view of the tubular member according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the tubular member. (A) is a top view of the tubular member and the light irradiation device, and (b) is a front view of the tubular member and the light irradiation device. (A) is a top view of the tubular member and the light irradiation device, and (b) is a front view of the tubular member and the light irradiation device. (A) is a top view of the tubular member and the light irradiation device, and (b) is a front view of the tubular member and the light irradiation device.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 16, one embodiment in the case where the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 as a first embodiment will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength (launching intensity) corresponding to the above, and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, and a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance and a windmill (movable member 310 are shown. (Not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, through gate 67, variable display device. The unit 80 and the like are assembled to form a peripheral portion thereof, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the game board 13 and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened more than in the normal state. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one time. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while synchronizing the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, the light effect device 1000 is arranged on the left side of the third symbol display device 81 in the front view. The light effect device 1000 is a device that performs an effect of moving the light emitted from the back surface in the vertical direction, and the details will be described later.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol string is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol string, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal period. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many chances that the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through. It is configured in. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. (See FIG. 4), a big hit lottery is made, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. (See FIG. 4), a big hit lottery is made, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). (State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" The symbol "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular first specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. Further, a second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, and has a circular shape having a size substantially the same as that of the other winning openings 63, 64, 640 in the substantially central portion thereof. A second specific winning opening 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the special winning openings 65a and 650a, which are normally closed, are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning openings 65a and 650a are closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (a large opening solenoid) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. (Not shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

Specifically, the second variable winning device 650 is an opening which is a guide path for guiding the ball to the second specific winning opening 650a and an opening opposite to the second specific winning opening 650a side of the guide path. A small opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening and closing of the 651, the driving accessory 650b for opening and closing the opening 651, and the driving accessory 650b in the left-right direction around the lower side of the opening 651 (not shown). And have. The second specific winning opening 650a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the small opening solenoid is driven to tilt the driving accessory 650b to the right to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the second specific winning opening 650a. It operates so as to alternate between the closed state and the closed state of time.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are set for a predetermined time. During the opening of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is set for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning openings 65a and 650a. A gaming state that is released a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special gaming state. Further, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are not limited to one, and one or more or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or Not limited to the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71 and a second out port 72. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are discharged through the first out opening 71 or the second out opening 72 (not shown). You will be guided to the road. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64, while the second out opening 72 is arranged on the left side of the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, the second out port 72 is arranged on the opposite side of the first out port 71 with the second specific winning opening 650a interposed therebetween.

Therefore, the ball that flows down the game area and reaches the lower end (inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side (right side in FIG. 2) of the second specific winning opening 650a in front view is the inner rail. It flows down along the inclination of 61 or the outer edge member 73 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the first out port 71, while the lower end of the game area (inner rail 61) on the left side of the front view from the second specific winning port 650a. ) Is flown down along the inclination (curvature) of the inner rail 61, and is guided to the ball discharge path through the second out port 72.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the like is performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6, the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the left side of the front view, and has a tubular member 1200, a guide member 1300, a light irradiation device 1400, and a decorative member 1500. The structure of the light effect device 1000 composed of the above will be described.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the light effect device 1000, and FIG. 6 is a front exploded perspective view of the light effect device 1000. Note that FIG. 6 shows a state in which the first half-cylinder member 1201 having a shape obtained by dividing the tubular member 1200 in half by a plane including the axis is arranged on the back side, and the first half-cylinder member 1201 The illustration of the second half-cylinder member 1202 (see FIG. 5) which forms a pair and is arranged on the front side is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the light effect device 1000 is formed below the outer wall portion 82 erected in a wall shape on the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). More specifically, the outer wall 82 is formed with a hole through which a ball can flow down, and below the hole is a metal introduction cylinder 83 for which the tubular member 1200 of the light effect device 1000 is externally fitted. It will be extended.

That is, the light effect device 1000 is arranged in a path through which the ball passes when flowing down the introduction cylinder 83, and is a tubular member 1200 rotatably fitted into the introduction cylinder 83. A guide member 1300 (see FIG. 6) formed on the inner surface side of the tubular member 1200 and guiding the sphere in a predetermined path, and a non-rotatably externally fitted to the introduction cylinder 83 and toward the tubular member 1200. It includes a light irradiation device 1400 that irradiates light, and a decorative member 1500 that is arranged on the front side of the tubular member 1200 and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material.

Examples of the resin material include resin materials such as PET, PC, and acrylic.

Explaining the positional relationship between the tubular member 1200, the guide member 1300, the light irradiation device 1400, and the decorative member 1500, the decorative member 1500 is arranged on the front side closest to the player, and the decorative member 1500 has a tubular shape on the back side of the decorative member 1500. A member 1200 and a guide member 1300 (see FIG. 6) included in the tubular member 1200 are arranged, and a light irradiation device 1400 is arranged on the back side of the tubular member 1200 and the guide member 1300. Here, since the decorative member 1500 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, the decorative member 1500 is visually recognized through the decorative member 1500, and the tubular member 1200 arranged on the back side of the decorative member 1500 is visually recognized. be able to.

The tubular member 1200 is assembled into a tubular shape having a circular cross section by fitting the first half tubular member 1201 and the second half tubular member 1202 to each other, and is outside the introduction cylinder 83 in the assembled state (see FIG. 5). The outer fitting shaft is rotatably supported in the fitting groove 83a (see FIG. 6). At this time, since the tubular member 1200 is cantilevered and pivotally supported by the introduction cylinder 83, friction during rotation of the tubular member 1200 does not occur at both ends of the tubular member 1200, and the sliding end portion 1211 It is limited to the friction generated in. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the friction of the tubular member 1200 during rotation.

Further, the tubular member 1200 is formed by providing a sliding end portion 1211 outerly fitted in the outer fitting groove 83a of the introduction cylinder 83 at one end portion and expanding the diameter from one end portion toward the other. In addition, the diameter-expanded portion 1210 formed of a metal material and the other end of the diameter-expanded portion 1210 opposite to one end are fitted and fixed, and have a cylindrical shape having the same diameter in the axial direction. It also includes a main body portion 1220 formed of a light-transmitting resin material. That is, the tubular member 1200 is assembled by fitting a total of four members, a diameter-expanded portion 1210 formed of a pair of semi-cylindrical members and a main body portion 1220 formed of a pair of semi-cylindrical members, to each other. It is formed by being done.

The method of fitting the four members forming the tubular member 1200 is not particularly limited. For example, fitting claws (not shown) are formed in opposite directions of the respective members, and the claws are fitted. For example, a columnar convex portion (not shown) is formed at a position where the members face each other, and a columnar convex portion is formed at a position corresponding to the columnar convex portion. A method may also be used in which a circular hole (not shown) having a diameter slightly smaller than the diameter of the convex portion is formed, and each member is fitted by fitting the cylindrical convex portion into the circular hole.

Since the enlarged diameter portion 1210 is formed of a metal material, it is possible to prevent the member from being deformed or scraped when the sliding end portion 1211 is slid into the outer fitting groove 83a, and the tubular member 1200 can be prevented from being deformed or scraped. Durability can be improved. Further, even if the tubular member 1200 becomes difficult to rotate due to sliding friction, the tubular member 1200 can be easily rotated by putting oil between the introduction cylinder 83 and the enlarged diameter portion 1210 of the tubular member 1200. can do. Examples of the metal material forming the enlarged diameter portion 1210 include brass and aluminum.

The main body portion 1220 is formed so as to project from the upper end portion to the lower end portion in a double spiral shape on the inner peripheral surface thereof, and the upper side surface (upper side in FIG. 7) is in contact with the sphere flowing down along the guide member 1300. A peripheral surface portion 1230 that is in contact with the low transmittance portion 1230 and a peripheral surface portion 1240 that is a peripheral surface other than the peripheral surface on which the low transmittance portion 1230 is formed and has a constant radial thickness. The end opposite to the end that is connected is opened. The cross-sectional shape of the low transmittance portion 1230 will be described later.

The guide member 1300 is a member that serves as a rail for allowing a ball flowing down inside the introduction cylinder 83 to flow down in a predetermined path, and is formed of a colorless and light-transmitting elastic material such as silicon rubber, and is formed of the introduction cylinder 83. The ring portion 1310 that is externally fitted and fixed to the tip portion, and the ring portion 1310 that extends from the right end of the lower end portion of FIG. 6 in the front view toward the lower left, and the main body portion 1220 of the tubular member 1200 in the assembled state (see FIG. 5). A sliding portion 1320 formed so as to approach the side surface of the sliding portion from the inside, a fall guide portion 1330 extending vertically downward from the extending end of the sliding portion 1320, and a ball of the fall guide portion 1330 flowing down. A thickening portion 1340 formed by thickening on the side (left side in FIG. 6), and a guide portion 1350 extending in a guide shape from both front side and back side surfaces of the sliding portion 1320 and the drop guide portion 1330. To be equipped.

The distance between the guide portions 1350 is formed to be slightly larger than that of the flowing sphere, and the sliding portion 1320, the fall guide portion 1330, and the thickening portion 1340 are centered on the side surface on the side where the sphere flows down with a radius of curvature larger than the radius of the sphere. Is formed in the shape of a recessed half pipe, so that when it comes into contact with the flowing ball, a force is applied to the ball toward the center side of the sliding portion 1320, the fall guide portion 1330, and the thickening portion 1340. Therefore, the ball that comes into contact with the low transmittance portion 1230 can flow down while being brought close to the central axis of the sliding portion 1320, the drop guide portion 1330, and the thickening portion 1340. As a result, when the ball flows down, the ball comes into contact with the guide member 1300 to prevent the ball from moving in the horizontal direction, and the ball can be effectively flowed down vertically.

The sliding portion 1320 is formed to have a thin wall shape, and its shape is maintained when a single ball is arranged on the sliding portion 1320, but when a predetermined number or more of balls are arranged on the sliding portion 1320, the sliding portion 1320 is formed in a thin shape. It is formed in such a manner that it is bent and deformed by the weight of the sphere.

The light irradiation device 1400 irradiates the tubular member 1200 and the decorative member 1500 with light from the back surface side, and a plurality of base portions 1410 that are externally fitted and fixed to the introduction cylinder 83 and a plurality of base portions 1410 fixed to the front side of the base portion 1410. A light source 1420 is provided. In the present embodiment, four light sources 1420 are arranged on the central axis of the base portion 1410, that is, in the front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 5), on the axis of the tubular member 1200 at equal intervals in the vertical direction. To.

The base portion 1410 has a fitting portion 1411 having a recessed portion outerly fitted and fixed to the introduction cylinder 83 at one end, a fastening hole 1412 formed in the fitting portion 1411, and one end of the fitting portion 1411. It is formed of a resin material and includes a rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 1413 that extends vertically downward from the other end portion that is the opposite end portion of the portion and has a light source 1420 arranged on the front side. ..

The fastening hole 1412 is fastened and fixed to the side surface of the game board 13 by a fastening screw (not shown) in the assembled state (see FIG. 5). Therefore, the light irradiation device 1400 is immovably fixed to the game board 13.

Since the light source 1420 irradiates light with weak directivity in a mode in which the front direction (thickness direction) of the base portion 1410 is the output direction, in the assembled state (see FIG. 5), if it is only near the axis of the tubular member 1200. Instead, the entire area including the position separated from the axis of the tubular member 1200 is irradiated with light. Further, the light emitted from the light source 1420 has the highest degree of brightness near the axis of the tubular member 1200, and the degree of brightness is weakened as the distance from the axis is increased (that is, the axis of the tubular member 1200). The output direction of the light source 1420 is directed toward the center). The decorative member 1500 is a member for visually recognizing the movement of light along the formed wavy pattern, and the details will be described later.

The light output direction of the light source 1420 means the direction in which the luminous intensity of the light emitted from the light source 1420 is the strongest, and the same applies to each embodiment described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the positional relationship between the tubular member 1200 and the guide member 1300 in the assembled state will be described.

FIG. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the introduction cylinder 83, the tubular member 1200, and the guide member 1300 in the assembled state. In addition, it passes through the central axis of the introduction cylinder 83 and is cross-sectionally viewed in a plane parallel to the game board 13 (see FIG. 2).

As shown in FIG. 7, in the assembled state, the drop guide portion 1330 of the guide member 1300 is arranged along the inner peripheral surface of the tubular member 1200. The ball passes through the introduction cylinder 83, reaches the guide member 1300, flows down on the sliding portion 1320 (flowing position P1), reaches the falling guide portion 1330 (flowing position P2), and then reaches the thickening portion 1340. (Flow position P3).

The drop guide portion 1330 is formed with a thickening portion 1340 from a position lowered by a predetermined distance from the upper end portion, but the tubular member 1200 is formed up to a position lowered by a predetermined distance from the upper end portion (for example, the flow position P2). A position where the distance between the overhanging end 1231 of the low permeability portion 1230 and the side surface of the drop guide portion 1330 facing the overhanging end 1231 is formed larger than the diameter of the sphere and the thickened portion 1340 is formed (for example, the flow-down position). In P3), the distance between the overhanging end portion 1231 of the low transmission rate portion 1230 and the side surface of the thickening portion 1340 facing the overhanging end portion 1231 is formed to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere.

That is, when the sphere is at the flow-down position P2, the distance between the guide member 1300 and the overhanging end portion 1231 of the tubular member 1200 is formed larger than the diameter of the sphere, so that the sphere can flow down on the guide member 1300. Will be done. On the other hand, when the sphere is at the flow-down position P3, the distance between the guide member 1300 and the overhanging end portion 1231 of the tubular member 1200 is formed to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere, so that the sphere comes into contact with the low transmittance portion 1230. And stopped.

Therefore, a force is applied from the sphere to the low transmittance portion 1230. Here, since the low transmittance portion 1230 is spirally formed on the tubular member 1200, the force in the gravity direction of the dropped sphere is directed to the extending direction of the low transmittance portion 1230. (See FIG. 8D) and the directional component F2 (see FIG. 8D) directed in the direction facing the low transmittance unit 1230. A part of the directional component F2 becomes a force acting on the tubular member 1200 in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the tubular member 1200 moves the contact position of the low transmittance portion 1230 with the sphere vertically downward (upper surface of FIG. 7). It is rotated counterclockwise) in the visual sense.

Next, the mechanism of rotation of the tubular member 1200 will be described with reference to FIG. 8 (a) to 8 (c) are views for explaining the process in which the sphere rotates the tubular member 1200 in chronological order, and are cross-sectional views of the tubular member 1200 and the guide member 1300. FIG. (D) is a side view of the tubular member 1200 in the direction of arrow VIIId of FIG. 8 (b). 8 (a) to 8 (c) are cross-sectionally viewed in a plane passing through the central axis of the introduction cylinder 83 and parallel to the game board 13 (see FIG. 2), and FIG. 8 (b) is shown in FIG. The state in which the sphere has flowed down a predetermined distance from the state shown in (a) is shown, and FIG. 8 (c) shows the state in which the sphere has flowed down a predetermined distance from the state shown in FIG. 8 (b).

As shown in FIG. 8A, before the sphere reaches the thickening portion 1340, the sphere does not abut on the low transmittance portion 1230 and flows down along the fall guide portion 1330.

As shown in FIG. 8B, when the sphere is brought into contact with the low transmittance portion 1230 of the tubular member 1200, the force of the directional component F2 acts on the low transmittance portion 1230 (see FIG. 8D). The tubular member 1200 is rotated around the introduction cylinder 83 in the rotation direction R1 (counterclockwise when viewed from above) along the direction of the directional component F2. Here, the sphere is restricted from moving in the horizontal direction (for example, in the left-right direction in FIG. 8D) on the inner peripheral surfaces of the thickened portion 1340, the guide portion 1350, and the tubular member 1200 of the guide member 1300. Therefore, the sphere is prevented from being separated from the low transmittance portion 1230, and the force of the directional component F2 can be effectively applied in the rotation direction of the tubular member 1200.

As shown in FIG. 8B, when the tubular member 1200 is rotated in the rotation direction R1 by the directional component F2 (see FIG. 8D), the contact point between the sphere and the low transmittance portion 1230 becomes tubular. It is moved below the member 1200 (downward in FIG. 8B). Then, as the tubular member 1200 is continuously rotated, as shown in FIG. 8C, the sphere reaches the lower end of the tubular member 1200 and is discharged downward from the lower end of the tubular member 1200. Returned to the game area.

That is, since the driving force for rotating the tubular member 1200 is generated by the flow of the sphere, the drive motor for rotating the tubular member 1200 is not required, so that the power cost required for rotating the tubular member 1200 is reduced. can do.

Further, the tubular member 1200 can be installed in a space-saving manner because the drive motor is not arranged. That is, the space for arranging the accessory such as the tubular member 1200 on the front side of the game board or the back side of the game board is limited to a certain range, but the drive motor for rotating the tubular member 1200 is not required to be arranged. The space that can be used as a result can be utilized as a space for arranging other moving accessories. Therefore, the degree of freedom in disposing of other moving accessories can be improved.

Further, after the sphere changes the appearance of the tubular member 1200 by rotating the tubular member 1200 (see FIG. 11), the ball obtained by rotating the tubular member 1200 is discharged from the lower end of the tubular member 1200. It is possible to return to the game area again. In this case, for example, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball obtained by rotating the tubular member 1200 is inevitably discharged out of the game area, so that the player is not disadvantaged in the number of winnings. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Here, the sphere is dropped along the tubular member 1200 by the action of gravity, and the tubular member 1200 is continuously rotated by receiving a force due to gravity from the dropped sphere, so that the tubular member 1200 is The sphere is continuously rotated while falling on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member 1200.

Further, even if the speed of the ball flowing down the game area is irregular, the ball flows down along the sliding portion 1320 of the introduction cylinder 83 and the guide member 1300 by the time the ball comes into contact with the tubular member 1200. Since the speed of the sphere is decelerated to the extent that irregularity is not recognized due to the collision force and frictional force given at that time, fluctuations in the flow speed of the sphere that rotates the tubular member 1200 are suppressed, and the tubular member is accompanied by this. The fluctuation of the rotation speed of 1200 is suppressed. Therefore, even when a sphere having an irregular flow speed or flow direction is used as the driving force, the mode of rotation of the tubular member 1200 can be made regular (continuous, small speed fluctuation).

It will be described back to FIG. The tubular member 1200 is rotated due to the ball falling vertically downward along the thickening portion 1340, and when the ball comes into contact with the low transmittance portion 1230 at the lower end of the sliding portion 1320, the ball is vertical. By contacting the low transmittance portion 1230 before it starts to fall downward, only a force directed in the radial direction of the tubular member 1200 is generated, and there is a possibility that a rotational force cannot be applied to the tubular member 1200.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, before the sphere reaches the thickening portion 1340, the sphere does not abut on the low transmittance portion 1230 of the tubular member 1200, and the sphere flows vertically downward along the thickening portion 1340. For the first time, it can be formed in such a manner that the sphere is brought into contact with the low transmittance portion 1230. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the ball comes into contact with the low transmittance portion 1230 of the tubular member 1200 to generate a rotational force in the tubular member 1200.

A case where the tubular member 1200 becomes difficult to rotate for some reason will be described. As described above, in the tubular member 1200, the sliding end portion 1211 is rotatably fitted into the outer fitting groove 83a of the introduction cylinder 83. Therefore, when the frictional force between the sliding end portion 1211 and the outer fitting groove 83a exceeds the force in the rotational direction of the tubular member 1200 given from the sphere toward the low transmittance portion 1230 of the tubular member 1200, the tubular member 1200 has a tubular shape. The member 1200 is not rotated. Then, when the ball is further entered through the introduction cylinder 83, a situation occurs in which the ball is deposited along the guide member 1300. In this case, the ball that has flowed down the introduction cylinder 83 is not returned to the game area, which is not preferable for the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the guide member 1300 is formed of elastic rubber, when a sphere is deposited on the guide member 1300, the guide member 1300 is partially (thin-walled) due to the weight of the accumulated sphere. The guide member 1300 is separated from the facing inner peripheral surface of the tubular member 1200 by bending and deforming downward (lower part in FIG. 7) to the lower portion from the sliding portion 1320 formed in the tubular member 1200. The accumulated sphere can be dropped from the transmittance portion 1230 and the thickening portion 1340 of the guide member 1300, and the sphere can flow down. As a result, the ball can be returned to the game area, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the shape of the low transmittance portion 1230 of the tubular member 1200 and the path of light when light is incident on the low transmittance portion 1230 will be described. FIG. 9 is a partial cross-sectional view of the tubular member 1200 viewed in cross section in a plane passing through the axis of the tubular member 1200. In FIG. 9, only the cut surface portion is shown, and the paths of light applied to the tubular member 1200 are shown by arrows L1 and L2.

As shown in FIG. 9, the low transmittance portion 1230 includes an overhanging end portion 1231 formed with a constant distance from the outer peripheral surface of the tubular member 1200 (formed with a constant thickness) and an overhanging end portion 1231 thereof. On both sides (upper and lower sides of FIG. 9), the inner peripheral surface (left side of FIG. 9) of the tubular member 1200 and the overhanging end portion 1231 are connected, and a pair of recessed side surfaces formed in a concave shape on the tubular member 1200 side. It is formed with a portion 1232. That is, the low transmittance portion 1230 is formed in a cross-sectional shape in which both sides connecting the trapezoidal upper base and the lower base are recessed inward.

Since the peripheral surface portion 1240 and the overhanging end portion 1231 are formed with a constant thickness, the parallel light L1 is emitted from the inner peripheral side (left side of FIG. 9) of the tubular member 1200 to the peripheral surface portion 1240 and the low transmittance portion 1230 of the tubular member 1200. When passing through the overhanging end portion 1231, the light is not diffused, and the degree of brightness of the light is maintained on the outer peripheral side (right side of FIG. 9) of the tubular member 1200. On the other hand, when the parallel light L2 passes through the concave side surface portion 1232 of the tubular member 1200 from the inner peripheral side (left side of FIG. 9) of the tubular member 1200, the concave surface shape of the concave side surface portion 1232 causes the parallel light L2 to act. The light is diffused, and the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized on the outer peripheral side (right side of FIG. 9) of the tubular member 1200 is visually recognized in a weakened state as compared with the light traveling in the path of the parallel light L1. ..

As a result, light is irradiated from the direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member 1200, and when the tubular member 1200 is visually recognized from a position facing the light irradiation device 1400 with the tubular member 1200 sandwiched between them, the outer peripheral side of the tubular member 1200 Then, the degree of light brightness is maintained at the overhanging end portion 1231 and the peripheral surface portion 1240, and the degree of light brightness is weakened at the recessed side surface portions 1232 formed on both sides of the overhanging end portion 1231.

Therefore, the portion that is visually recognized by the low transmittance unit 1230 while maintaining the degree of brightness of the light emitted from the light source 1420 of the light irradiation device 1400 is the peripheral surface portion 1240 on both sides in the width direction of the low transmittance unit 1230. And the overhanging end portion 1231 of the low transmittance portion 1230 can be divided into three, and the light to be visually recognized can be subdivided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10, the appearance when light is irradiated from the back surface side of the tubular member 1200 toward the tubular member 1200 by the light irradiation device 1400 will be described. FIG. 10 is a front view of the light effect device 1000 in the assembled state. The decorative member 1500 is not shown, and the light visually recognized through the tubular member 1200 is shown in a band-shaped shaded pattern. In addition, the shade of the shaded pattern expresses the intensity of the brightness of the visually recognized light. That is, the darker the portion, the stronger the degree of brightness is visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 10, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 1400 toward the tubular member 1200 is the overhanging end portion 1231 and the peripheral surface portion 1240 of the low transmittance portion 1230 formed on the front side of the tubular member 1200. The degree of brightness of the light that is visually recognized through the passage is maintained strongly, and conversely, the light that is visually recognized through the recessed side surface portion 1232 is diffused and the degree of brightness of the light is increased. It is weakened. As a result, the light is visually recognized in a manner divided by the low transmittance unit 1230. Here, since the low transmittance portion 1230 is formed in a double helix shape on the inner peripheral surface of the tubular member 1200, the portion having a high degree of light brightness is relative to the axial center of the tubular member 1200. It is visually recognized as an inclined band.

Although the light is also divided by the low transmittance portion 1230 formed on the back surface side of the tubular member 1200, the directivity of the light emitted from the light source 1420 (see FIG. 6) of the light irradiation device 1400 is weak. Even if the light is divided by the low transmittance portion 1230 on the back side of the tubular member 1200, the light is combined with the light emitted from the plurality of light sources 1420 on the front side of the tubular member 1200. The boundary of the division is visually recognized in a mode that is difficult to distinguish. Therefore, the action of dividing the light is remarkably visually recognized in the portion on the front side of the tubular member 1200, and accordingly, the light has a band shape inclined with respect to the axis of the tubular member 1200. It is visually recognized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11, changes in the appearance of the tubular member 1200 caused by the rotation of the tubular member 1200 will be described. 11 (a) to 11 (c) are views for explaining the changes in appearance caused by the rotation of the tubular member 1200 in chronological order, and are front views of the light effect device 1000. 11 (b) shows a state in which the tubular member 1200 is rotated by a predetermined angle in the rotation direction R1 from the state shown in FIG. 11 (a), and FIG. 11 (c) shows FIG. 11 (b). The state in which the tubular member 1200 is rotated by a predetermined angle in the rotation direction R1 from the state shown in FIG. 11 (a) is shown, and the decorative member 1500 is omitted in FIGS. 11 (a) to 11 (c). ..

In FIG. 11, the light visually recognized through the tubular member 1200 is illustrated in a band-shaped shaded pattern. In addition, the shade of the shaded pattern expresses the intensity of the brightness of the visually recognized light. That is, the darker the portion, the stronger the degree of brightness is visually recognized.

As shown in FIGS. 11A to 11C, when the tubular member 1200 is rotated in the rotation direction R1, the pattern in the front view of the tubular member 1200 becomes the axial direction of the tubular member 1200 ( It is visually recognized in a mode of being moved to (lower part of FIG. 11).

More specifically, when paying attention to the representative portion S corresponding to a part of the low transmittance portion 1230, the representative portion S is actually moved in the rotation direction of the tubular member 1200 due to the rotation of the tubular member 1200. However, since the low transmittance portion 1230 is formed without interruption over the entire circumference of the tubular member 1200, it is easy for the player to misunderstand that the representative portion S is moved downward. That is, it is not possible to determine whether the representative portion S has been moved in the axial direction X of the tubular member 1200 or in the axial direction Y.

Therefore, although the tubular member 1200 actually rotates about the axis and the low transmittance portion 1230 is moved in the direction X perpendicular to the axis, the low transmittance portion 1230 moves in the axial direction Y of the tubular member 1200. It is visually recognized as if it was done. That is, in FIG. 11B, the representative portion S moves from the position Y0 to the position Y1 along the axial direction Y by rotating the tubular member 1200 in the rotation direction R1 from the state of FIG. 11A. In FIG. 11 (c), the tubular member 1200 is rotated in the rotation direction R1 from the state of FIG. 11 (b), so that the representative portion S is positioned along the axial direction Y. It is easy to be misunderstood as if it was moved from Y1 to position Y2.

As a result, the pattern of light visually recognized through the tubular member 1200 in the front view is translated in the axial direction of the tubular member 1200 without controlling the light source 1420 (see FIG. 6) of the light irradiation device 1400. be able to.

For example, when the position of the light visually recognized through the tubular member 1200 is moved in parallel by changing the light output direction of the light source 1420 (see FIG. 6) of the light irradiation device 1400, the moving distance of the light becomes long. , The swing angle that changes the light output direction of the light source 1420 becomes large. Further, as the distance between the light source 1420 and the tubular member 1200 becomes shorter, the swing angle for changing the light output direction of the light source 1420 becomes larger.

Therefore, in order to shorten the distance between the tubular member 1200 and the light source 1420 while keeping the moving distance of the light emitted from the light source 1420 (see FIG. 6) long, it is necessary to increase the swing angle of the light source 1420. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the light source 1420 is reduced. On the other hand, when the distance between the tubular member 1200 and the light source 1420 is increased, the swing angle of the light source 1420 can be suppressed to some extent, but the arrangement space of the light effect device 1000 becomes large, and other accessories The placement space is reduced. Therefore, it is difficult to greatly move the light emitted from the light source 1420 while securing the arrangement space for other accessories.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the movement of the light emitted from the light source 1420 (see FIG. 6) to the tubular member 1200 is caused by the rotation of the tubular member 1200, so that the tubular member 1200 and the light source 1420 It is possible to keep the moving distance of the light emitted from the light source 1420 long while shortening the distance to and from. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large moving distance of the light visually recognized through the tubular member 1200 while securing the arrangement space for other accessories.

It will be described back to FIG. When the guide member 1300 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member 1200, the light emitted from the light source 1420 (see FIG. 6) of the light irradiation device 1400 is shielded by the guide member 1300, and is tubular in front view. The degree of brightness of the light visually recognized on the peripheral surface of the member 1200 may be weakened. However, in the present embodiment, the guide member 1300 is arranged so as to be moved to the left in the front view from the axial center of the tubular member 1200. That is, since the guide member 1300 is arranged at a position separated from the output direction of the light emitted from the light source 1420 of the light irradiation device 1400, the influence of weakening the degree of light brightness can be limited. it can.

Further, since the guide member 1300 is formed of a colorless and light-transmitting elastic material such as silicon rubber, the light emitted from the light source 1420 (see FIG. 6) of the light irradiation device 1400 is shielded by the guide member 1300. As a result, the degree to which the degree of brightness of light is weakened can be reduced.

It will be described back to FIG. In the light effect device 1000, the decorative member 1500 is arranged on the most front side, and the decorative member 1500 is formed so as to shield the tubular member 1200 in front view. As described above, since the decorative member 1500 is formed of a resin material and has a portion through which light is transmitted, the light visually recognized on the front side of the tubular member 1200 can be visually recognized via the decorative member 1500. Is formed in.

Next, the decorative member 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. 12 (a) is a front view of the decorative member 1500, FIG. 12 (b) is a rear view of the decorative member 1500, and FIG. 12 (c) is a view in the direction of arrow XIIC of FIG. 12 (a). It is a side view of the decorative member 1500, FIG. 12 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the decorative member 1500 in the XIId-XIid line of FIG. 12 (a), and FIG. 12 (e) is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG. 12 (a). It is a partial side view of the decorative member 1500 in the direction view of arrow XIIe. For ease of understanding, in FIG. 12D, only the cross-sectional portion is partially illustrated, and the other portions are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 12, the decorative member 1500 is separated from the main body portion 1510 formed in a rectangular plate shape and the back side of the main body portion 1510, extends parallel to the main body portion 1510, and is attached to the game board 13. It includes a pair of plate-shaped fastening portions 1520 having fastening holes to be fastened, and a rectangular plate-shaped connecting portion 1530 extending from the main body portion 1510 to the fastening portion 1520.

The main body portion 1510 projects in a band shape on the back side, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 5), a plurality of rows of low transmittance are formed in a wavy shape along a direction inclined along the axis of the tubular member 1200 (see FIG. 5). It is provided with a rate portion 1511 and a straight strip-shaped portion 1512 formed on the front side so as to intersect with the low transmittance portion 1511.

As shown in FIG. 12D, the low transmittance portion 1511 is formed so that both side surfaces in the width direction are recessed toward the decorative member 1500. Therefore, the light is diffused by the same action as the recessed side surface portion 1232 of the low transmittance portion 1230 of the tubular member 1200 described above, and the degree of brightness of the visually recognized light is weakened. Further, the cross-sectional shape of the decorative member 1500 is formed into a concave shape between the adjacent low transmittance portions 1511 (see FIG. 12D).

Here, for example, when light is applied to the entire width direction of the decorative member 1500 from the back side of the decorative member 1500 and the light is moved in the vertical direction (FIG. 12 (a) vertical direction), the decorative member 1500 is used. When the light is visually recognized through the decorative member 1500 from the front side of the above, it is visually recognized as if the light is moved along the low transmittance portion 1511 between the adjacent low transmittance portions 1511.

That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 5), in the state where the decorative member 1500 is not present, as described above, the tubular member 1200 is rotated so that the light is moved in the axial direction of the tubular member 1200. Although it is visually recognized, when the movement of the light is visually recognized through the decorative member 1500, it is visually recognized that the light is moved along the low transmittance portion 1511 of the decorative member 1500. Therefore, the light can be visually recognized as moving along a wave shape inclined in the axial direction of the tubular member 1200, and the effect of light can be complicated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the action of the decorative member 1500 to divide light will be described. FIG. 13 is a front view of the light effect device 1000. A partially enlarged front view of the light effect device 1000 is also shown. In FIG. 13, the pattern of light visually recognized through the tubular member 1200 is illustrated as a band-shaped shaded pattern. In addition, the intensity of the degree of brightness of the visually recognized light is expressed by the shade of the band-shaped shaded pattern that illustrates the light.

As shown in FIG. 13, the light is divided at the low transmittance portion 1511 of the decorative member 1500 as a boundary. That is, since the decorative member 1500 is formed with a concave cross-sectional shape between the adjacent low transmittance portions 1511, the light visually recognized through the adjacent low transmittance portions 1511 is affected by the concave surface shape. It is visually recognized in a mode of being reduced in the direction connecting the adjacent low transmittance portions 1511 (the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the low transmittance portion 1511). Therefore, the light is divided by the low transmittance unit 1511. Therefore, the outer shape of the light can be further subdivided as compared with the case where the light is visually recognized through the tubular member 1200.

It will be described back to FIG. As shown in FIG. 12 (e), the strip-shaped portion 1512 is formed so that both side surfaces in the width direction are recessed toward the decorative member 1500 side, and the low transmittance portion 1511 of the tubular member 1200 is extended in front view. Since it is formed in a manner that intersects the direction, when the light is moved along the low transmittance portion 1511 of the decorative member 1500 by the rotation of the tubular member 1200, the light traverses the strip portion 1512. At that time, the outer shape of the light is changed by the action of the shape of the band-shaped portion 1512.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, a path when light passes through the strip 1512 will be described. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the path of light.

As shown in FIG. 14, the plate T1 extending in the vertical direction of the paper surface and formed of a light-transmitting resin material has a cross-sectional shape similar to that of the strip-shaped portion 1512 and is extended in the vertical direction of the paper surface. It has a part T2. When the light sources L10 and L11 that irradiate light from the back side of the plate T1 (right side of FIG. 14) are visually recognized from the front side of the plate T1 (left side of FIG. 14), the light does not pass through the band-shaped portion T2 (light from the light source L10). The light travels straight, but when the light passes through a concave portion formed on the side surface of the band-shaped portion T2 (light from the light source L11), the light is refracted by the action of the concave shape. Then, the light incidented by the light source L11 is visually recognized as if it was incident from the virtual light source L12, and as a result, the outer shape of the light is visually recognized as being shrunk. Here, when the light source is moved from the position of the light source L10 to the position of the light source L11, the outer shape of the light is visually recognized in such a manner that it is shrunk as the light moves.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the change in the outer shape of the light that traverses the strip 1512 will be described. 15 (a) to 15 (c) are views for explaining in chronological order the changes in the appearance of the decorative member 1500 caused by the movement of the light visually recognized through the decorative member 1500 in the vertical direction. It is a partially enlarged front view of 1000.

In order to facilitate understanding, only the light pattern visually recognized through the peripheral surface portion 1240 sandwiched between the pair of low transmittance portions 1230 adjacent to each other in the front view is illustrated by a shaded pattern, and the light of the other portion is illustrated. 15 (b) shows a state in which light is moved downward from the state shown in FIG. 15 (a), and FIG. 15 (c) is shown in FIG. 15 (b). The state in which the light is moved downward from the state in which the light is moved is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 15A, the pattern of light visually recognized in a mode of being moved along the low transmittance portion 1511 is irrespective of the left and right positions of the decorative member 1500 before approaching the strip-shaped portion 1512. It is visually recognized with a uniform width (a width equivalent to the interval between adjacent low transmittance portions 1230). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15B, when the pattern of light approaches the band-shaped portion 1512, the light near the band-shaped portion 1512 is contracted in the width direction of the band-shaped portion 1512 (attracted to the band-shaped portion 1512 and cut off). The light flowing along the arrow S1) is visually recognized.

When the light is moved further downward from the state of FIG. 15 (b), as shown in FIG. 15 (c), the light ends crossing the band-shaped portion 1512 on the left side of the decorative member 1500 and is visually recognized. On the right side of the decorative member 1500, the light near the strip 1512 is contracted in the width direction of the strip 1512 (attracted to the strip 1512 and cut, arrow S2). Light flowing along). Therefore, in the process of moving the light along the low transmittance portion 1511 of the decorative member 1500, the pattern of the light visually recognized is changed in order at the left and right positions of the strip-shaped portion 1512.

Therefore, the pattern of the moving light can be visually recognized by the player in a manner changed during the movement. Further, since the change of the light pattern can be performed at an arbitrary portion of the decorative member 1500 according to the arrangement position of the strip-shaped portion 1512, the effect of the light effect device can be improved.

Next, a change in the appearance of the light effect device 1000 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (a) and 16 (b) are front views of the light effect device 1000. Note that FIG. 16B shows a state in which the tubular member 1200 is rotated by a predetermined angle from the state shown in FIG. 16A.

As described above, the tubular member 1200 is rotated by the force generated by the flow of the sphere, and at that time, the sphere is flowed down on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member 1200. Therefore, the light is shielded by the sphere, and the shadow Sh of the sphere can be visually recognized in the front view. The shadow Sh of the sphere is moved in the axial direction of the tubular member 1200 (the shadow Sh of the sphere is moved from the state of FIG. 16A to the state of FIG. 16B), so that the light is emitted. Is moved in the axial direction of the tubular member 1200, so that the effect of being visually recognized by the player can be improved.

Further, the intensity of the brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member 1200 in the front view is adjusted by controlling the intensity of the brightness of the light emitted from the light source 1420 of the light irradiation device 1400. However, in the present embodiment, the shadow Sh of the flowing sphere is used to form the light that is visually recognized to have different strengths. Therefore, since it is not necessary to control the switching of the degree of brightness of the light emitted from the light source 1420 of the light irradiation device 1400, the control cost of the light irradiation device 1400 can be suppressed.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 27. In the light effect device 1000 of the first embodiment, the case where the tubular member 1200 is rotated by the sphere flowing down the inner peripheral side of the tubular member 1200 has been described, but in the light effect device 2000 of the second embodiment, A case where the tubular member 2200 is rotated by the ball flowing down the outer peripheral side of the tubular member 2200 will be described. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The overall configuration of the light effect device 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a front perspective view of the light effect device 2000. Note that FIG. 17 shows a state in which the decorative member 2500 has been removed.

As shown in FIG. 17, the light effect device 2000 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the tubular member 2200 rotatably fitted to the introduction cylinder 83 and the tubular member 2200, and the spheres are arranged in a predetermined path. The guide member 2300 to be flowed down, the light irradiation device 2400 that is swingably arranged around the introduction cylinder 83 and irradiates light toward the tubular member 2200, and the light irradiation device 2400 that is arranged on the front side of the tubular member 2200. It also includes a decorative member 2500, which is arranged so as to be in contact with the guide member 2300 and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material.

On the upper side of the arrangement position of the light effect device 2000, the first flow down hole 2084 and the second flow down hole 2085 are bored in the outer wall portion 82 with an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The first flow down hole 2084 is formed on the left side of the introduction cylinder 83 when viewed from the front, and the guide member 2300 is fixed to the lower side of the first flow down hole 2084 so as to hang below the outer wall portion 82.

The guide member 2300 is a member that serves as a rail for allowing a ball flowing down through the first flow down hole 2084 to flow down in a predetermined path, and is made of a resin material having sufficient rigidity, and one end thereof is an outer wall. It is fixed to the lower end of the portion 82, and the other end, which is the opposite end of the one end, is extended toward the tubular member 2200, and the tubular member 2200 is in the assembled state (see FIG. 17). A sliding portion 2320 formed so as to be close to the side surface of the main body portion 2220, a fall guide portion 2330 extending vertically downward from the extending end of the sliding portion 2320, and a ball of the fall guide portion 2330. A thickened portion 2340 formed by thickening the flow-down side (right side in FIG. 17), and a guide-like extension from the front side and the back side side surface of the sliding portion 2320 and the back side side surface of the fall guide portion 2330. A ball having a guide portion 2350 and flowing down the first flow down hole 2084 is caused to flow down along the guide member 2300 and is brought into contact with the low transmittance portion 2230 of the tubular member 2200.

In the sliding portion 2320, the fall guide portion 2330, and the thickening portion 2340, the side surface (right side in FIG. 17) on the side where the ball flows down is formed on the flat plate. Therefore, in relation to the guide member 2300, the sphere can move vertically downward and to the front side during the flow. On the other hand, as will be described later, since the decorative member 2500 is arranged on the front side and the movement of the ball to the front side is restricted, the flow path of the ball is restricted vertically downward.

The second flow down hole 2085 is formed on the right side of the introduction cylinder 83 when viewed from the front, and is formed directly above the collision portion 2414 of the light irradiation device 2400. The ball flowing down through the second flow-down hole 2085 collides with the collided portion 2414, and the base portion 2410 of the light irradiation device 2400 is swung by the collision force generated at that time. Details will be described later.

In the tubular member 2200, a peripheral surface portion 2240 is formed between the low transmittance portions 2230 formed in a spiral shape on the outer peripheral surface thereof. Since the technical features of the cross-sectional shape of the low transmittance portion 2230 and the cross-sectional shape of the low transmittance portion 1230 in the first embodiment are common, the description thereof will be omitted.

The peripheral surface portion 2240 is formed so that the cross-sectional shape in a plane passing through the axial center is a concave surface shape recessed inside the tubular member 2200. Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the refraction action of light due to the shape of the peripheral surface portion 2240 will be described.

FIG. 18 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the tubular member 2200 viewed in cross section in a plane passing through the axis. The outer peripheral side of the tubular member 2200 is shown as the left side of FIG. 18, the inner peripheral side is shown as the right side of FIG. 18, and only the cut surface portion is shown.

Since the cross-sectional shape of the peripheral surface portion 2240 in the plane passing through the axial center is formed as a concave surface shape recessed inside the tubular member 2200, the light passing through the center of the peripheral surface portion 2240 travels straight from the center of the peripheral surface portion. Light is refracted as it passes farther away. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, the light emitted from the light source L21 arranged on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member 2200 toward the outer peripheral side of the tubular member 2200 is visible from the outer peripheral side of the tubular member 2200. Then, it is visually recognized as being irradiated from the virtual light source L22.

That is, for the player who visually recognizes the light emitted from the light irradiation device 2400 (see FIG. 17) through the tubular member 2200 on the front side of the tubular member 2200, the light is on the central side of the peripheral surface portion 2240 of the tubular member 2200. It is visually recognized in an aspect (a mode in which light is shrunk and separated from the low transmittance unit 2230) that is brought to (a set of midpoints of lines connecting adjacent low transmittance units 2230). Therefore, the action of light being divided by the low transmittance portion 2230 of the tubular member 2200 can be made more remarkable.

The above-mentioned action of refraction of light occurs regardless of whether the concave curved surface is formed on the light source L21 side or the opposite side of the light source L21, and the concave curved surface is formed on the peripheral surface portion 2240. It occurs even if it is formed on both the inner and outer sides of the. Therefore, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 2400 (see FIG. 17) arranged on the back surface side of the tubular member 2200 passes through the peripheral surface portion 2240 formed on the back surface side portion of the tubular member 2200. It is refracted once and then refracted again by passing through the peripheral surface portion 2240 formed on the front side portion of the tubular member 2200. Next, with reference to FIG. 19, a pattern of light visually recognized through the first half-cylinder portion 2201 which is a portion on the back surface side of the tubular member 2200 will be described.

FIG. 19A is a front view of the tubular member 2200 and the light irradiation device 2400, and FIG. 19B is a side view of the tubular member 2200 and the light irradiation device 2400. Note that FIGS. 19A and 19B show a state in which the first half-cylinder member 2201 having a shape obtained by dividing the tubular member 2200 in half by a plane including the axis is arranged on the back surface side. The second half-cylinder member 2202, which forms a pair with the first half-cylinder member 2201 and is arranged on the front side, is shown by a broken line. Further, FIG. 19A illustrates a pattern of light when the light emitted from the light source 1420 of the light irradiation device 2400 is visually recognized through the first half-cylinder member 2201 of the tubular member 2200, and FIG. 19B is shown. ), The path of the light emitted from the light source 1420 of the light irradiation device 2400 is illustrated by an arrow.

As shown in FIG. 19B, light with weak directivity is emitted from the light source 1420 of the light irradiation device 2400, and the tubular member 2200 is irradiated with light over a wide range in the width direction from the back surface side. Further, the irradiated light is visually recognized in such a manner that the degree of brightness is the strongest near the axis of the tubular member 2200 in the front view, and the degree of brightness is weakened as the distance from the axis of the tubular member 2200 is reduced. To.

As described above, the light visually recognized on the peripheral surface portion 2240 of the tubular member 2200 is visually recognized in a manner of being brought toward the center side of the peripheral surface portion 2240 by the action of the concave surface shape of the peripheral surface portion 2240. Therefore, since the light pattern to be visually recognized is kept away from the low transmittance unit 2230, the boundary of the light divided by the low transmittance unit 2230 can be more clearly discriminated.

Here, the curvature of the concave shape can be freely selected. For example, by forming the curvature of the concave surface to be small, the pattern of light visually recognized on the peripheral surface portion 2240 of the tubular member 2200 can be made narrower. Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the pattern of light visually recognized through the tubular member 2200 will be described.

FIG. 20A is a front view of the tubular member 2200 and the light irradiation device 2400, and FIG. 20B is a side view of the tubular member 2200 and the light irradiation device 2400. FIG. 20 (a) shows a pattern of light when the light emitted from the light source 1420 of the light irradiation device 2400 is visually recognized through the tubular member 2200, and FIG. 20 (b) shows the light source of the light irradiation device 2400. The path of the light emitted from 1420 is illustrated by an arrow.

As described above, the peripheral surface portion 2240 of the tubular member 2200 is visually recognized in a manner of being brought closer to the center side of the peripheral surface portion 2240 due to the action of the concave surface shape. Further, the concave-shaped action described above occurs in the first half-cylinder member 2201 which is the back side portion of the tubular member 2200 and the second half-cylinder member 2202 which is the front side portion. Therefore, the light divided into the narrow outer shape by the first half-cylinder member 2201 is further divided by the second half-cylinder member 2202 in a mode in which the narrow width direction of the light is divided.

That is, in the front view, the pattern of the light emitted from the light source 1420 of the light irradiation device 2400 visually recognized through the tubular member 2200 is reduced to the area surrounded on all sides by the low transmittance portion 2230 and visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize that a plurality of lights separated from each other are formed on the peripheral surface of the tubular member 2200. As a result, the number of lights visually recognized through the tubular member 2200 can be increased while suppressing the number of light sources 1420 arranged in the light irradiation device 2400.

Further, for example, when the shape of the light source 1420 of the light irradiation device 2400 is formed in a star shape, the outer shape of the light formed in each region surrounded on all sides by the low transmittance portion 2230 is formed in a star shape. Therefore, the number of lights visually recognized through the tubular member 2200 can be increased without impairing the device of the shape of the light source.

Here, the curvature of the concave surface of the peripheral surface portion 2240 can be freely selected. By forming the curvature of the concave surface portion 2240 to be small, the light pattern visually recognized in the region surrounded on all sides by the low transmittance portion 2230 in the front view can be made smaller in diameter. In this case, the divided lights can be easily discriminated as separate ones, and the effect of increasing the number of lights can be improved.

Next, the swing of the light irradiation device 2400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. First, the shape of the light irradiation device 2400 will be described with reference to FIG.

21 (a) is a top view of the light irradiation device 2400, FIG. 21 (b) is a front view of the light irradiation device 2400, and FIG. 21 (c) is a side view of the light irradiation device 2400. ..

As shown in FIG. 21, the light irradiation device 2400 is a device that irradiates the tubular member 2200 (see FIG. 17) and the decorative member 2500 (see FIG. 17) with light from the back surface side, and is externally fitted and fixed to the introduction cylinder 83. A base portion 2410 to be formed and a plurality of light sources 1420 fixed to the front side of the base portion 2410 are provided. In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the light source 1420 moves up and down on the central axis of the base portion 2410, that is, on the axis of the tubular member 2200 in the front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 17). Four are arranged at equal intervals.

The base portion 2410 has a fitting portion 2411 having a recessed portion outerly fitted and fixed to the introduction cylinder 83 at one end thereof, and the fitting portion 2411 having a central axis of the introduction cylinder 83 in an assembled state (see FIG. 17). It has an elongated hole shape bent along a central circle, and is vertical from the sliding hole 2412 to be drilled and the other end, which is the opposite end of the fitting portion 2411 to be formed. It is a plate-shaped portion formed by extending downward and projecting a rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 2413 in which a light source 1420 is arranged on the front side and one end portion of the fitting portion 2411. The back side is provided with a collided portion 2414 formed in a lowered manner.

The collided portion 2414 is a portion formed vertically below the flow-down hole 2285 in the assembled state (see FIG. 17), and the collided portion 2414 is irradiated with light by colliding with a ball flowing down the flow-down hole 2285. The device 2400 is swung around the introduction cylinder 83. Since the collided portion 2414 is formed so as to be lowered toward the back surface side, the light irradiation device 2400 is viewed clockwise (see FIG. 21 (a)) when the sphere collides with the collided portion 2410. Is swayed to.

In the present embodiment, the sliding shaft P21 (see FIG. 22) fixed to the back surface side of the game board 13 slides on the inner peripheral side of the sliding hole 2412 in the swinging direction of the light irradiation device 2400. Even if a large load is applied, the sliding shaft P21 and the end of the sliding hole 2412 are in contact with each other, and the swing angle of the light irradiation device 2400 is regulated. Further, even if the light irradiation device 2400 is shaken, it is returned to the initial position by the urging force R21 (see FIG. 22) of a torsion spring (not shown).

Therefore, normally, the light output direction is directed to the vicinity of the axis of the tubular member 2200, and the light irradiation device 2400 is swung only when the sphere collides with the collided portion 2414 to change the light output direction. It is possible to perform the effect of changing. Next, with reference to FIG. 22, a change in the pattern of light visually recognized through the tubular member 2200 in the front view due to the swing of the light irradiation device 2400 will be described.

22 (a) and 22 (b) are top views of the tubular member 2200 and the light irradiation device 2400, and FIGS. 22 (c) and 22 (d) are the tubular member 2200 and the light irradiation device 2400. It is a front view of. Note that FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (c) show a state in which the light irradiation device 2400 is arranged at an initial position, and FIGS. 22 (b) and 22 (d) show that the light irradiation device 2400 is shaken. The moved state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 22A, in the initial position, the urging force R21 acts on the light irradiation device 2400, and the right end of the sliding hole 2412 of the light irradiation device 2400 is in contact with the sliding shaft P21. The posture of the light irradiation device 2400 is maintained. In this case, in front view, the degree of brightness of the emitted light becomes the strongest in the vicinity of the axis of the tubular member 2200, and the degree of brightness decreases as the distance from the axis increases.

From the state of FIG. 22A, when a sphere that has passed through the second flow down hole 2085 (see FIG. 17) collides with the collided portion 2414, a rotational force F21 is applied to the light irradiation device 2400, and the light irradiation device 2400 Is swung clockwise in the top view (see FIG. 22B). In this case, the light visually recognized in the front view has the strongest degree of brightness at a position deviated to the left by a predetermined distance from the axis of the tubular member 2200. That is, the light irradiation device 2400 is swung so that the light output direction is moved to the left.

Further, since the urging force R21 is applied to the light irradiation device 2400, the light irradiation device 2400 is returned to the initial position again. Along with this, the light output direction is visually recognized so as to be moved to the right in the front view. Therefore, when the sphere collides with the collided portion 2414 of the light irradiation device 2400, the position where the degree of light brightness is strongly formed is visually recognized in a mode of reciprocating in the left-right direction.

Here, as a method of changing the light output direction of the light irradiation device 2400, it is conceivable to change the light output direction of the light source 1420 by controlling it with a drive motor or the like. In that case, the material cost of the drive source is changed. Also, a control cost for controlling the drive source is required.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, each time the ball collides with the collided portion 2414, the output direction of the light in the front view is reciprocated in the left-right direction, so that the drive motor is produced while the light vibrates left and right. Etc. can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of producing light and suppress the material cost and control cost required for the drive source.

Further, as described above in the first embodiment, the degree of brightness of light visually recognized on the peripheral surface of the tubular member 2200 by rotating the tubular member 2200 (cylindrical member 1200, see FIG. 11). The pattern formed by the difference between the above is visually recognized as being moved in the axial direction. On the other hand, when the light irradiation device 2400 is oscillated, the light output direction is visually oscillated in the left-right direction. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect in which the light moves up, down, left and right, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Even in the mode of moving the light up, down, left and right, the driving force for moving the light is only the kinetic energy of the flowing sphere, so that the effect of producing the light is improved and the material cost and control cost required for the driving source are improved. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 to 26, a mechanism for branching the flow path of the sphere that has passed through the first flow hole 2084 will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 23, the formation pattern of the low transmittance portion 2230 of the tubular member 2200 will be described.

FIG. 23 is a developed view of the tubular member 2200. The outer peripheral side of the tubular member 2200 is shown on the front side, and the shape of the low transmittance portion 2230 is shown in a simplified form for easy understanding.

As shown in FIG. 23, the low transmittance portion 2230 is formed in a double helix shape and has a portion divided by a width larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the vicinity of the lower end of the tubular member 2200 and the first spiral portion 2230a. A second spiral portion 2230b whose inclination angle is changed by The first spiral portion 2230a and the second spiral portion 2230b extend from the upper end portion to the lower end portion of the tubular member 2200, respectively.

Here, the inclination angle of the low transmittance portion 2230 means, for example, the angle formed by the axial center of the tubular member 2200 and the low transmittance portion 2230 in a front view.

The first spiral portion 2230a has a dividing portion in which the protrusion of the tubular member 2200 from the peripheral surface is partially suppressed, and the second spiral portion 2230b is a bent portion serving as a starting point at which the inclination angle is changed. It has 2233.

Here, the divided portion is positioned at a position (height at which the branch groove 2531 starts to be formed) corresponding to the height at which the branch groove 2531 (see FIG. 24) of the decorative member 2500 is formed in the assembled state (see FIG. 17). It is formed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the shape of the decorative member 2500, which is arranged in such a manner that the back surface is in contact with the guide member 2300 in the assembled state (see FIG. 17) and has a role of guiding the flowing ball, will be described. To do. 24 (a) is a front view of the decorative member 2500, FIG. 24 (b) is a rear view of the decorative member 2500, and FIG. 24 (c) is a top view of the decorative member 2500. In FIG. 24C, the outer shape of the tubular member 2200 in the assembled state (see FIG. 17) is shown by a broken line.

As shown in FIG. 24, the decorative member 2500 is a member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a main body portion 2510 formed in a rectangular plate shape and a main body portion 2510 on the back surface side of the main body portion 2510. A plate-shaped fastening portion 2520 having a fastening hole that is formed in parallel with the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) and is extended from the main body portion 2510 to the fastening portion 2520 and is in an assembled state (see FIG. 25). ), The tubular member 2200 and the connecting portion 2530 having a concentric curved surface formed on the back surface side are provided.

The main body portion 2510 is formed so as to project in a band shape on the back surface side, and is formed in a wavy shape in a plurality of rows along a direction inclined with respect to the axial direction of the tubular member 2200 in the assembled state (see FIG. 25). A plurality of pieces formed so as to project to the front side in a mode of intersecting the transmittance portion 2511 and the low transmittance portion 2511 (that is, a mode of intersecting the extending direction of the low transmittance portion 2511 in the front view in the assembled state). A band-shaped portion 2512 is provided. Since the technical idea of the cross-sectional shape of the low transmittance portion 2511 and the strip-shaped portion 2512 is the same as the technical idea of the cross-sectional shape of the low transmittance portion 1511 and the strip-shaped portion 1512 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 24 (a), the strip-shaped portion 2512 has two streaks formed vertically (up and down position in FIG. 24 (a)) on the front side of the decorative member 2500, and has a low transmittance portion 2511 in front view. At each intersection, the overhanging portion and the flattened portion are alternately formed. Further, in the region sandwiched between the pair of adjacent low transmittance portions 2511, when the strip-shaped portion 2512 of one of the two strip-shaped portions 2512 overhangs, the other on the opposite side of the strip-shaped portion 2512. The strip 2512 of the muscle is formed in a flattened manner. Therefore, as will be described later, the change in the pattern of the moving light (see FIG. 27) visually recognized through the decorative member 2500 can be complicated.

As shown in FIG. 24 (c), the connecting portion 2530 of the decorative member 2500 is formed in a groove shape bent on the back surface and a branch groove 2531 formed in a shape in which a sphere is guided and can flow down (FIG. 24 (FIG. 24). b) has).

The branch groove 2531 is a groove that is inclined downward from the back surface portion of the connecting portion 2530 of the decorative member 2500 toward the main body portion 2510, bent at a predetermined position, extends vertically downward, and extends to the lower end of the decorative member 2500. It is formed into a shape (see FIG. 24 (b)). Here, the position in the height direction (position in the vertical direction in FIG. 24B) where the branch groove 2531 starts to be formed from the back surface side of the connecting portion 2530 is the position of the tubular member 2200 in the assembled state (see FIG. 25). Since the divided portion of the spiral portion 2230a is formed in a manner corresponding to the position in the height direction in which the divided portion is formed, the path through which the sphere flows can be branched, as will be described later.

The depth dimension and the width dimension of the branch groove 2531 are formed so as to allow a ball that comes into contact with the peripheral surface portion 2240 of the tubular member 2200 and flows down in the assembled state (see FIG. 25). In the present embodiment, the width dimension of the branch groove 2531 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the depth dimension of the branch groove 2531 is in contact with the peripheral surface portion 2240 of the tubular member 2200 in the assembled state. When the ball flows down, it is formed in a size with a slight gap. Therefore, the sphere is formed so as to flow down along the branch groove 2531 of the decorative member 2500.

The back surface portion of the connecting portion 2530 formed on the side surface side (right side in FIG. 24 (b)) of the formation depth of the branch groove 2531 is the front surface of the drop guide portion 2330 of the guide member 2300 in the assembled state (see FIG. 25). It is formed so that it can come into contact with the side surface. Along with this, the back surface portion of the connecting portion 2530 formed on the center side (left side of FIG. 24 (b)) of the formation depth of the branch groove 2531 is arranged to face the guide portion 2350 of the guide member 2300 in the assembled state. It functions as a guide on the front side when the ball flows down along the guide member 2300.

That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 25), the ball flowing down the first flow-down hole 2084 is the drop guide portion 2330 (or thickening portion 2340) of the guide member 2300, the guide portion 2350, and the peripheral surface portion 2240 of the tubular member 2200. And flow down in a path formed by the back side of the connecting portion 2530 of the decorative member 2500.

Here, a mode in which the sphere flows down along the guide member 2300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. First, with reference to FIG. 25, a case where the sphere abuts on the first spiral portion 2230a and flows down at the start of contact between the sphere and the low transmittance portion 2230 of the tubular member 2200 will be described.

FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining the process of the sphere flowing down along the guide member 2300 in chronological order, and FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c) show the tubular member 2200, the guide member 2300, and the guide member 2300 in the assembled state. It is a front view of the decorative member 2500. It should be noted that the illustration of the light irradiation device 2400 is omitted, the portion of the tubular member 2200 shielded by the decorative member 2500 is shown by a broken line, and the branch groove 2531 of the decorative member 2500 is shown by a broken line. For the sake of simplicity, the low transmittance portion 2511 and the strip-shaped portion 2512 are omitted. Note that FIG. 25 (b) shows a state in which the sphere has flowed down a predetermined distance from the state shown in FIG. 25 (a), and FIG. 25 (c) shows the sphere from the state shown in FIG. 25 (b). Is shown in the state where it has flowed down a predetermined distance.

As shown in FIG. 25A, the sphere comes into contact with the first spiral portion 2230a of the tubular member 2200 and flows down. Here, the sphere is prevented from moving in the horizontal direction by the drop guide portion 2330 of the guide member 2300, the guide portion 2350, the peripheral surface portion 2240 of the tubular member 2200, and the side surface on the back side of the connecting portion 2530 of the decorative member 2500. , The sphere is flowed vertically downward, and the low transmittance portion 2230 of the tubular member 2200 is pushed by the weight of the sphere, so that the tubular member 2200 is rotated. By rotating the tubular member 2200, the contact position between the sphere and the low transmittance portion 2230 is moved downward, and the sphere is caused to flow downward accordingly.

When the sphere flows down, the tubular member 2200 is rotated, and the low transmission rate portion 2230 formed spirally on the peripheral surface of the tubular member 2200 is rotated. Therefore, as described above in the first embodiment. The light visually recognized through the rotated tubular member 2200 is visually recognized in a mode of being moved in the axial direction of the tubular member 2200, but since it is the same technical concept as the technical concept described in the first embodiment, The explanation is omitted.

When the sphere flows down to the position shown in FIG. 25 (b), the divided portion of the first spiral portion 2230a is arranged below the sphere. That is, the low transmittance portion 2230 that supported the sphere from below is no longer formed under the sphere, and the resistance when the sphere flows vertically downward is minimized. Then, the sphere flows vertically downward and abuts on the second spiral portion 2230b. Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), the sphere flows down the tubular member 2200 through the portion (the portion below the bent portion 2233) where the inclination angle of the low transmittance portion 2230 changes slightly. That is, in the process of the ball flowing down, the position where the ball flows down is always to the left of the front view of the tubular member 2200.

Focusing on the rotation speed of the tubular member 2200, from FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (b), the sphere flows down at a substantially constant speed, and the rotation speed of the tubular member 2200 is also about constant accordingly. However, in FIG. 25 (b), since the sphere freely falls, the force due to the weight of the sphere acting on the tubular member 2200 disappears, and the rotation speed of the tubular member 2200 becomes FIG. 25 (a). ) Is smaller than the state.

Further, in FIG. 25 (c), among the low transmittance portions 2230 abutting on the sphere, the inclination angle below the bent portion 2233 is formed smaller than in the case of FIG. 25 (a). Therefore, the rotation angle at which the tubular member 2200 is rotated when the sphere flows down a predetermined distance from the state of FIG. 25 (a) is the tubular member 2200 when the sphere flows down a predetermined distance from the state of FIG. 25 (c). Is greater than the rotation angle at which is rotated.

For example, if the spheres flow down at the same speed, the spheres flow down a predetermined distance from the state shown in FIG. 25 (c) as compared to the case where the spheres flow down a predetermined distance from the state shown in FIG. The rotation angle of the shape member 2200 becomes smaller. Therefore, the rotation speed of the tubular member 2200 can be changed even when the flow speed of the sphere is unlikely to fluctuate.

Therefore, in the process in which the sphere flows down along the path shown in FIG. 25, the rotational speed of the tubular member 2200 is variably formed. Therefore, the effect of rotating the tubular member 2200 to move the light in the axial direction of the tubular member 2200 can be complicated, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), the portion where the inclination angle of the low transmittance portion 2230 is small is formed only in the lower end portion (the portion below the bent portion 2233) of the tubular member 2200, and the low transmittance portion 2230 is formed. The sphere is discharged below the tubular member 2200 in a state of being in contact with a portion having a small inclination angle. Therefore, if the player remembers the rotation speed of the tubular member 2200 when the ball flows down in contact with the portion where the inclination angle of the low transmittance portion 2230 is small, the rotation speed of the tubular member 2200 can be confirmed. This makes it possible to confirm the timing at which the ball is discharged from the lower end of the tubular member 2200. Therefore, the flow position of the sphere can be confirmed by confirming the mode of the change in appearance visually recognized through the tubular member 2200 without paying attention to the sphere (or the shadow Sh of the sphere).

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, at the start of contact between the sphere and the low transmittance portion 2230 of the tubular member 2200, the sphere abuts on the second spiral portion 2230b of the tubular member 2200 and flows down. explain.

FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining the process of the sphere flowing down along the guide member 2300 in chronological order, and FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c) show the tubular member 2200, the guide member 2300, and the guide member 2300 in the assembled state. It is a front view of the decorative member 2500. The light irradiation device 2400 is not shown, the tubular member 2200 is shown with a broken line in a portion shielded by the decorative member 2500, and the decorative member 2500 is shown with a broken line at the fastening portion 2520 and the branch groove 2531. At the same time, the illustration of the low transmittance portion 2511 and the strip-shaped portion 2512 is omitted for ease of understanding. Note that FIG. 26 (b) shows a state in which the sphere has flowed down a predetermined distance from the state shown in FIG. 26 (a), and FIG. 26 (c) shows the sphere from the state shown in FIG. 26 (b). Is shown to flow down along the branch groove 2531.

As shown in FIG. 26A, the sphere comes into contact with the second spiral portion 2230b of the tubular member 2200 and flows down. Here, the sphere is prevented from moving in the horizontal direction by the drop guide portion 2330 of the guide member 2300, the guide portion 2350, the peripheral surface portion 2240 of the tubular member 2200, and the side surface on the back side of the connecting portion 2530 of the decorative member 2500. , The sphere is flowed vertically downward, and the low transmittance portion 2230 of the tubular member 2200 is pushed by the weight of the sphere, so that the tubular member 2200 is rotated. By rotating the tubular member 2200, the contact position between the sphere and the low transmittance portion 2230 is moved downward, and the sphere is caused to flow downward accordingly.

When the sphere flows down to the position shown in FIG. 26B, the branch groove 2531 of the decorative member 2500 is arranged on the front side of the sphere. When the sphere flows downward, it flows down by rotating the tubular member 2200, and therefore receives a resistance force from the tubular member 2200. Therefore, the resistance of the sphere is lower when it flows down toward the branch groove 2531 than when it flows down. Therefore, the sphere is flowed down through the branch groove 2531.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the sphere flows downward through the front side of the tubular member 2200. That is, in the process of flowing down, the sphere flows vertically downward on the left side of the tubular member 2200 when viewed from the front, but flows downward from the middle through the front side of the tubular member 2200.

Therefore, the path through which the ball flows can be changed depending on whether the ball is in contact with the first spiral portion 2230a or the second spiral portion 2230b of the tubular member 2200.

As described above in the first embodiment, the sphere produces the shadow Sh of the sphere irradiated from the light irradiation device 2400 (see FIG. 21) in the front view, and the shadow Sh of the sphere moves when the sphere flows down. Therefore, it is possible to create a shadow in the light (see FIG. 16). In the present embodiment, since the flow path of the sphere can be further branched, it is possible to form a plurality of movement paths of the shadow Sh of the sphere generated in the light, and it is possible to increase the pattern of the effect of the shadow Sh of the sphere. it can.

Whether the sphere is in contact with the first spiral portion 2230a or the second spiral portion 2230b of the tubular member 2200 depends on the posture of the tubular member 2200 when the sphere is flowed down. Is determined by. Then, for example, when the time from when the sphere is discharged downward of the tubular member 2200 to the end of the rotation of the tubular member 2200 varies, the tubular member 2200 when the sphere is flowed down The posture is randomly determined. Therefore, the posture of the tubular member 2200 when the rotation of the tubular member 2200 is stopped after the flowing ball is discharged from the tubular member 2200 is irregularly changed. Therefore, the selection of the flow path of the sphere (selection of whether the sphere is in contact with the first spiral portion 2230a or the second spiral portion 2230b) is also irregular, and the path of the sphere is branched. It is possible to make the effect of the spiral irregular and improve the effect of the effect.

Further, when the sphere is brought into contact with the first spiral portion 2230a at the start of contact between the sphere and the low transmittance portion 2230 of the tubular member 2200, the sphere is also brought into contact with the second spiral portion 2230b. Also in this case, immediately before the sphere is discharged from below the tubular member 2200, the low transmittance portion 2230 is formed so as to be in contact with a portion having a small inclination angle (the lower portion of the bent portion 2233).

Therefore, at the start of contact between the sphere and the low transmittance portion 2230 of the tubular member 2200, whether the sphere is in contact with the first spiral portion 2230a or the second spiral portion 2230b. Regardless of the rotation angle at which the tubular member 2200 is rotated when the sphere flows down a predetermined distance, the sphere is discharged below the tubular member 2200 rather than immediately after the sphere comes into contact with the low transmittance portion 2230. The one immediately before is smaller.

Therefore, at the start of contact between the sphere and the low transmittance portion 2230 of the tubular member 2200, whether the sphere is in contact with the first spiral portion 2230a or the second spiral portion 2230b. Regardless of this, the rotational speed of the tubular member 2200 can be changed. Therefore, when the tubular member 2200 is rotated, the moving speed of the light moved in the axial direction of the tubular member 2200 can be changed, so that the moving speed of the light becomes a constant speed, which produces an effect. It is possible to prevent it from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the effect of the movement of light visually recognized through the tubular member 2200.

Further, if the player remembers the rotation speed of the tubular member 2200 when the ball flows down in contact with the portion where the inclination angle of the low transmittance portion 2230 is small, the rotation speed of the tubular member 2200 can be confirmed. This makes it possible to confirm the timing at which the ball is discharged from the lower end of the tubular member 2200. Therefore, the flow position of the sphere can be confirmed by confirming the mode of the change in appearance visually recognized through the tubular member 2200 without paying attention to the sphere (or the shadow Sh of the sphere).

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the change in the outer shape of the light passing through the strip 2512 will be described. FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining the change in appearance caused by the movement of light visually recognized through the decorative member 2500 in the vertical direction in chronological order, and FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b) show the decorative member 2500. It is a partially enlarged front view of. Note that FIG. 27 (b) shows a state in which light is moved downward from the state shown in FIG. 27 (a). Since the technical idea of moving the light visually recognized through the decorative member 2500 downward is the same as the technical idea of moving the light visually recognized through the decorative member 1500 downward, the description thereof is omitted here.

As shown in FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b), the light is visually recognized with a uniform width regardless of the left and right positions of the decorative member 2500 before reaching the band-shaped portion 2512. On the other hand, when the light reaches the band-shaped portion 2512, the width direction of the light in the vicinity of the band-shaped portion 2512 (the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the band-shaped portion 2512) is reduced.

As described above, in the decorative member 2500, the overhanging portion and the flattened portion are alternately formed in each region where the strip-shaped portion 2512 is sandwiched between the pair of low transmittance portions 2511. Therefore, that part is sandwiched between the part where the light is shrunk by the light hitting the strip-shaped portion 2512 of the upper streak and the part where the light is shrunk by the light hitting the strip-shaped part 2512 of the lower streak. The pair of low transmittance portions 2511 are different. That is, when the regions sandwiched by the pair of low transmittance portions 2511 are expressed as the peripheral surfaces A and B, respectively, the peripheral surface A and the lower surface where the light is shrunk by the light reaching the strip-shaped portion 2512 of the upper streak. It is different from the peripheral surface B in which the light is shrunk when the light hits the strip-shaped portion 2512 of the side streaks.

In this case, for example, when light hits the strip-shaped portion 2512 of the upper streak, the light is shrunk on the peripheral surface A, but the light is not shrunk on the adjacent peripheral surface B. Further, when the light reaches the strip-shaped portion 2512 of the lower streak, the light is shrunk on the peripheral surface B, but the light is not shrunk on the adjacent peripheral surface A.

Therefore, in the outer shape of the light, the portion where the light is contracted and the portion where the outer shape of the light is maintained are alternately formed along the streaks of the strip-shaped portion 2512 (alternately between the peripheral surface A and the peripheral surface B). , The pattern of light visually recognized through the decorative member 2500 can be made into a more complicated shape.

Further, when the light moving up and down is visually recognized through the decorative member 2500, the peripheral surface on which the light is shrunk when the light approaches the band-shaped portion 2512 is set to the position (upper side or lower side) of the plurality of strip-shaped portions 2512. ), By making the peripheral surface A or the peripheral surface B different, the change in the outer shape of the visually recognized light can be made more complicated.

Therefore, the pattern of the moving light visually recognized through the decorative member 2500 is changed in a complicated manner during the movement, and the pattern of the light is changed at an arbitrary position of the decorative member 2500. Therefore, the effect of the light effect device 2000 (see FIG. 17) can be improved.

Here, for example, when light is applied to the entire width direction of the decorative member 2500 from the back side of the decorative member 2500 and the light is moved in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 27), the front side of the decorative member 2500. When the light is visually recognized through the decorative member 2500, it can be visually recognized as if the light is moved along the low transmittance section 2511 between the adjacent low transmittance sections 2511.

Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 17), when the tubular member 2200 is rotated so that the light is visually recognized as being moved in the axial direction of the tubular member 2200, the light is passed through the decorative member 2500. When the movement of the light is visually recognized, it is visually recognized that the light is moved along the low transmittance portion 2511 of the decorative member 2500. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the light as if it is inclined and moves in the axial direction of the tubular member 2200, and it is possible to improve the effect of the movement of the light.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 31. In the light effect device 1000 of the first embodiment, the sphere pushes the low transmittance portion 1230 of the tubular member 1200 by its own weight in the process of flowing down vertically in a state where the sphere is in contact with the tubular member 1200. Although the case where the tubular member 1200 is rotated by advancing is described, in the light effect device 3000 of the third embodiment, the sphere collides with the transmitting portion 3300 formed on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member 3200. Then, the case where the tubular member 3200 is rotated will be described. The same parts as those in each embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 28 is a front perspective view of the light effect device 3000. In FIG. 28, the side surface of the tubular member 3200 and the decorative member 1500 are partially omitted, and the internal structure of the tubular member 3200 is partially illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 28, the light effect device 3000 is arranged in a path through which the introduction cylinder 3083 formed in the outer wall portion 82 is passed when the ball flows down, and is rotatable outside the introduction cylinder 3083. A tubular member 3200 to be fitted, a light irradiation device 1400 that is non-rotatably fitted to the introduction cylinder 3083 and irradiates light toward the tubular member 3200, and an arrangement on the front side of the tubular member 3200. It is provided with a decorative member 1500, which is provided and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material.

The introduction cylinder 3083 is a tubular member formed of a metal material extending below the outer wall portion 82, and the inner diameter dimension in the minor axis direction is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the game board 13 ( One end is fixed around an elongated hole formed in the left-right direction (see FIG. 2), and on the outer peripheral surface of the other end, which is the opposite end of the one end. It has a groove-shaped outer fitting groove 3083a (see FIG. 30) formed in an annular shape over the periphery.

The introduction cylinder 3083 is formed so that the major axis direction of the inner diameter is reduced from one end to the other end, and the inner diameter and the outer diameter of the cylinder are circular at the other end. , The degree of diameter reduction in the major axis direction is asymmetric (see FIG. 30). Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the direction in which the ball enters the introduction cylinder 3083 in the major axis direction, and the tubular member 3200 can be rotated outside at the lower end of the introduction cylinder 3083. It can be fitted, and there are multiple types of flow directions (angles with respect to the axis) of the flowing ball with respect to the axial center of the tubular member 3200, depending on the direction in which the ball flows down along the inner peripheral surface of the introduction cylinder 3083 in the major axis direction. Can be formed.

The tubular member 3200 is assembled into a circular cross-section by facing each other and fitting members having a shape obtained by dividing the tubular shape by a plane including the axis, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), the outside of the introduction cylinder 3083. It is rotatably fitted into the fitting groove 3083a (see FIG. 30). Further, the tubular member 3200 is provided with a sliding end portion 3211 outerly fitted in the outer fitting groove 3083a of the introduction cylinder 3083 at one end portion (upper side of FIG. 28), and the one end portion to the other end portion ( A diameter-expanded portion 3210 formed by concentrically expanding the diameter toward the lower side of FIG. 28 and formed from a metal material, and one end portion (upper side of FIG. 28) at the other end portion of the diameter-expanded portion 3210. ) Is fitted and fixed, and the diameter is reduced from one end toward the other end (lower side in FIG. 28), which is the opposite end, and is a light-transmitting resin material. It is provided with a main body portion 3220 formed from the above, and a plurality of transmission portions 3300 formed near the upper end of the main body portion 3220 and extending from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 3220 to the vicinity of the axial center.

Since the enlarged diameter portion 3200 is formed of a metal material, it is possible to prevent the member from being deformed or scraped when the sliding end portion 3211 is slid into the outer fitting groove 3083a (see FIG. 30). The durability of the tubular member 3200 can be improved. Further, even when the tubular member 3200 becomes difficult to rotate due to sliding friction, it is possible to make the tubular member 3200 easier to rotate by adding oil. Examples of the metal material forming the enlarged diameter portion 3200 include brass and aluminum.

The main body portion 3220 is a peripheral surface that connects the low transmittance portion 3230 (see FIG. 31) formed by projecting from the inner peripheral surface in a double helix shape and the peripheral surface on which the low transmittance portion 3230 is formed. A peripheral surface portion 3240 having a constant radial thickness, and in a plane orthogonal to the axis toward the other end (lower side in FIG. 28) from one end (upper side in FIG. 28). The cross-sectional shape is concentric and the diameter is reduced, and an opening through which a sphere can be discharged is formed at the other end. Since the technical idea of the cross-sectional shape of the low transmittance portion 3230 is the same as the technical idea of the cross-sectional shape of the low transmittance portion 1230 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, since the tubular member 3200 is externally fitted to the introduction cylinder 3083 on one side and is pivotally supported, friction during rotation of the tubular member 3200 does not occur at both ends of the tubular member 3200, and the sliding end. It is limited to the friction generated in the portion 3211. Therefore, the friction during rotation of the tubular member 3200 can be reduced.

Next, the shape of the transmission unit 3300 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. 29 (a) is a top view of the main body portion 3220 of the tubular member 3200, and FIG. 29 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission portion 3300 in the XXIXb-XXIXb line of FIG. 29 (a). (C) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission unit 3300 in the XXIXc-XXIXc line of FIG. 29 (a). Note that FIG. 29 (a) shows a shape viewed from the large diameter side in the axial direction, and FIGS. 29 (b) and 29 (c) show only a cross-sectional portion.

The transmission unit 3300 includes six deformed vanes that are erected at equal intervals in the radial direction from the inner peripheral surface of the tubular member 3200, and each of these deformed vanes has the same shape. The deformed wing portion of 1 will be described, and the description of the other deformed wing portions will be omitted. The transmission portion 3300 includes a first collision surface 3310 formed of a resin material and formed near the peripheral surface of the tubular member 3200, and a second collision surface 3320 formed near the axial center of the tubular member 3200. , A rod-shaped connecting portion 3330 that connects the first collision surface 3310 and the second collision surface 3320 in the radial direction.

In the top view, the distance G31 of the space between the adjacent first collision surfaces 3310, which has the widest gap near the peripheral surface of the tubular member 3200, is formed to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere, so that it is tubular. In the vicinity of the peripheral surface of the member 3200, the sphere flowing down the inner peripheral side of the tubular member 3200 always collides with any of the first collision surfaces 3310. Therefore, the tubular member 3200 is rotated by being collided with the flowing sphere, and then the sphere passes through the vertical gap (see FIG. 28) between the first collision surface 3310 and the second collision surface 3320. The ball is swept down.

Further, in the top view, the distance G32 in the space of the second collision surface 3320 facing each other across the axial center of the tubular member 3200 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the sphere, so that the axial center of the tubular member 3200 is formed. The sphere that flows down in the vicinity is formed so that it can flow down without colliding with any part of the transmission unit 3300.

As shown in FIG. 29B, the first collision surface 3310 of the transmission unit 3300 is formed in a plate shape in which the shape visible from the radial inside of the tubular member 3200 is inclined downward to the right. .. Therefore, when the ball flows down and collides with the first collision surface 3310, the tubular member 3200 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from above. In the present embodiment, the inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction is formed by θ.

As shown in FIG. 29 (c), the second collision surface 3320 of the transmission unit 3300 is formed in a plate shape in which the shape visible from the radial inside of the tubular member 3200 is inclined downward to the left. .. Therefore, when the ball flows down and collides with the second collision surface 3320, the tubular member 3200 is rotated clockwise when viewed from above. In the present embodiment, the inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction is equal to the inclination angle of the first collision 3310 and is formed at θ.

That is, when the sphere collides with the first collision surface 3310 or the second collision surface 3320, the tubular member 3200 can be rotated in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions. Therefore, as described later, the cylinder By rotating the shaped member 3200, the light visually recognized in the front view can be visually recognized by the player in a manner of being moved upward, or can be visually recognized by the player in a manner of being moved downward.

Here, the first collision surface 3310 and the second collision surface 3320 are formed in a direction opposite to the vertical direction and are formed at θ having the same inclination angle, so that the spheres flow down. However, for example, when a collision occurs with the first collision surface 3310 or the second collision surface 3320 at a vertical downward direction and at a constant velocity, the magnitude of the collision force in the rotational direction received by the cylindrical member 3200 due to the collision is the same. However, since the distance from the axis of the tubular member 3200 in which the collision occurs is different, the rotational torque generated is different.

That is, the rotational torque is larger when the sphere collides with the first collision surface 3310 than when the sphere collides with the second collision surface 3320. When the rotational torque is large, the tubular member 3200 is rotated at a higher speed.

Therefore, the rotational speed of the tubular member 3200 rotated by the collision of the spheres is higher when the tubular member 3200 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the upper surface than when it is rotated clockwise when viewed from the upper surface. As a result, the moving speed of the light when it is visually recognized as being moved in the axial direction of the tubular member 3200 by rotating the tubular member 3200 (see FIG. 31). Can be changed for each direction (upward or downward), and the mode of the speed of the effect of light movement can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the relationship between the path of the sphere flowing down the inner peripheral surface of the tubular member 3200 and the tubular member 3200 will be described. FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view of the introduction cylinder 3083 and the tubular member 3200. The cross section is viewed in a plane including the axis of the tubular member 3200 and the major axis of one end of the introduction cylinder 3083.

As shown in FIG. 30, the inner diameter of the introduction cylinder 3083 is formed in such a manner that the diameter is gradually reduced in the major axis direction, and the degree of the diameter reduction is formed asymmetrically with respect to the major axis direction. By flowing down along the inner peripheral surface of the 3083, the sphere is greatly inclined with respect to the axial direction of the tubular member 3200, and the direction D31 toward the first collision surface 3310 and the axial center of the tubular member 3200. It is possible to flow down by a path such as direction D32 toward the second collision surface 3320 in a direction slightly inclined with respect to the direction.

Further, for example, when the sphere flows down along the axial direction of the tubular member 3200, the sphere passes through the gap (see FIG. 29) at the center of the transmission portion 3300, so that the sphere of the transmission portion 3300 It does not collide with anything and the tubular member 3200 does not rotate.

For example, when the sphere flows down in the direction D31, the sphere collides with the first collision surface 3310 of the transmission unit 3300, and the tubular member 3200 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from above. Further, for example, when the sphere flows down in the direction D32, the sphere collides with the second collision surface 3320 of the transmission unit 3300, and the tubular member 3200 is rotated clockwise when viewed from above.

Here, when light is visually recognized through the tubular member 3200 when the sphere flows down the inner peripheral side of the tubular member 3200, as described above in the first embodiment, the shadow Sh of the sphere is reflected in the visually recognized light. (See FIG. 16) occurs. Since a plurality of paths may occur in the flow path of the sphere leading to the transmission unit 3300, a plurality of paths may also occur in the movement path of the shadow Sh of the sphere flowing down the light effect device 3000 in the front view. Therefore, it is possible to increase the types of movement paths of the shadow Sh of the sphere that is visually recognized through the tubular member 3200 in the front view, and it is possible to improve the effect of the effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a change in the pattern of light visually recognized through the tubular member 3200 in front view will be described. 31 (a) to 31 (c) are front views of the light effect device 3000. Note that FIG. 31 (b) shows a state in which the tubular member 3200 is rotated by a predetermined angle counterclockwise when viewed from above from the state shown in FIG. 31 (a), and FIG. 31 (c) shows a state in which the tubular member 3200 is rotated by a predetermined angle. A state in which the tubular member 3200 is rotated by a predetermined angle clockwise from the state shown in (a) is shown, and FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (c) show the decorative member 1500. Omitted.

By rotating the tubular member 3200, the position of the low transmittance portion 3230 in the front view is moved in the axial direction of the tubular member 3200, and the light visually recognized through the tubular member 3200 is moved in the axial direction. The technical idea of visually recognizing in the movable mode is that the light visually recognized through the tubular member 1200 is visually recognized in the axial direction by rotating the tubular member 1200 (see FIG. 11). Since it is common to the above-mentioned technical idea in the first embodiment, the description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 31 (b), when the tubular member 3200 is rotated counterclockwise (rotation direction R1) when viewed from above, the low transmittance portion 3230 moves upward (upward in FIG. 31 (b)). Will be done. In this case, the light visually recognized through the tubular member 3200 is visually recognized in an upwardly moving manner. Here, since the cross-sectional shape of the tubular member 3200 increases as it goes upward, the width of the tubular member 3200 and the area of each region surrounded by the low transmittance portion 3230 are the tubular member 3200 in the front view. The upper side is larger than the lower side.

Therefore, as the tubular member 3200 is rotated and the light is moved upward, the outer shape of the light becomes larger. That is, since the player can simultaneously visually recognize the two changes of the change in which the light is moved and the change in which the light is magnified, the effect of producing the light can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 31 (c), when the tubular member 3200 is rotated clockwise in the top view (rotation direction R2), the low transmittance portion 3230 is moved downward (downward in FIG. 31 (c)). To. In this case, the light visually recognized through the tubular member 3200 is visually recognized in a manner of being moved downward. Here, since the cross-sectional shape of the tubular member 3200 is reduced as it goes downward, the width of the tubular member 3200 and the area of each region surrounded by the low transmittance portion 3230 are the tubular member 3200 in the front view. The lower side is smaller than the upper side of.

Therefore, as the tubular member 3200 is rotated and the light is moved downward, the outer shape of the light becomes smaller. That is, since the player can simultaneously visually recognize the two changes of the change in which the light is moved and the change in which the light is reduced, it is possible to improve the effect of producing the light.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. In the light effect device 1000 of the first embodiment, the case where the tubular member 1200 has a circular cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis has been described, but in the light effect device 4000 of the fourth embodiment, the tubular member 4200 is A case will be described in which a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis is formed in an elliptical shape, and a load can be applied to the refracting member 4430 adjacent to the tubular member 4200 on the outer peripheral surface of the tubular member 4200. The same parts as those in each embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 32 is a front perspective view of the light effect device 4000. As shown in FIG. 32, the light effect device 4000 is arranged in a path through which the introduction cylinder 83 formed in the outer wall portion 82 is passed when the ball flows down, and is rotatably outside the introduction cylinder 83. A tubular member 4200 to be fitted, a guide member 1300 (see FIG. 6), and a light irradiation device 4400 that is non-rotatably fitted in the introduction cylinder 83 and irradiates light toward the tubular member 4200. A decorative member (not shown) which is arranged on the front side of the tubular member 4200 and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material.

As shown in FIG. 32, the tubular member 4200 has an elliptical cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis, and is rotatably supported by the outer fitting groove 83a (see FIG. 6) of the introduction cylinder 83 in the assembled state. Will be done.

The tubular member 4200 is provided with a sliding end portion 1211 outerly fitted in the outer fitting groove 83a (see FIG. 6) of the introduction cylinder 83 at one end (upper side of FIG. 32), and the other end is provided with the other. A diameter-expanded portion 1210 formed by expanding the diameter toward an end portion (lower side in FIG. 32) and formed from a metal material, and one end portion (upper side in FIG. 32) at the other end portion of the diameter-expanded portion 1210. ) Is fitted and fixed, and extends from one end to the other end (lower side in FIG. 32) having the same shape and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material. It includes a main body 4220.

The main body portion 4220 is based on the main body portion 1220 (see FIG. 5) in the first embodiment, and has a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis having a length Da in the major axis direction and a length Db (Da> Db) in the minor axis direction. It is formed in a shape in which the outer circumference is partially thickened so as to have an elliptical shape formed from (see FIG. 33 (b)). Therefore, as described above in the first embodiment, the low transmittance portion 1230 (see FIG. 6) is formed so as to project from the inner peripheral surface of the tubular member 4200, and the guide member 1300 (FIG. 6) is formed on the low transmittance portion 1230. The tubular member 4200 is rotated by the contact of the balls flowing down along (see 6).

Further, the outer peripheral surface of the main body 4220 is formed at substantially the same pitch as the low transmittance portion 1230, and is formed in a spiral shape inclined at a constant inclination angle at the axis of the main body 4220, and also transmits light. A low transmittance portion 4230 on the outer peripheral side is formed, which is formed to have a lower transmittance than other portions of the main body portion 4220.

The outer peripheral side low transmittance portion 4230 is masked by attaching a tape to a portion other than the shape of the outer peripheral side low transmittance portion 4230 to be formed on the main body portion 4220, and the paint having low transmittance is sprayed to dry the paint. It is formed by peeling off the tape later.

The tubular member 4200 and the light irradiation device 4400 have a relationship in which the tubular member 4200 can come into contact with a refracting member 4430 which is swingably arranged on the front side of the light irradiation device 4400, which will be described later, and swing. It is formed. Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the positional relationship between the tubular member 4200 and the light irradiation device 4400 will be described.

33 (a) is a side view of the tubular member 4200 and the light irradiation device 4400, and FIGS. 33 (b) and 33 (c) are top views of the tubular member 4200 and the light irradiation device 4400. Note that FIG. 33 (b) shows a state in which the tubular member 4200 faces the light irradiation device 4400 in the minor axis direction, and FIG. 33 (c) shows a state in which the tubular member 4200 points in the major axis direction toward the light irradiation device 4400. The oriented state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (c), the light irradiation device 4400 is a device that irradiates the tubular member 4200 and the decorative member 1500 (see FIG. 5) with light from the back surface side, and is an introduction cylinder 83. It is provided with a base portion 1410 that is externally fitted and fixed, a plurality of light sources 1420 that are fixed to the front side of the base portion 1410, and a refracting member 4430 that is swingably formed on the front side of the light source 1420.

In the present embodiment, four light sources 1420 are arranged on the central axis of the base portion 1410, that is, in the front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 32), on the axial center of the tubular member 4200 at equal intervals in the vertical direction. To. Among those light sources 1420, the refraction member 4430 is arranged in each of the light source 1421 arranged at the top and the light source 1423 arranged third from the top, and the refraction members 4430 are horizontal to each other. It is formed so as to be swung in the opposite direction in the direction (direction along the paper surface in FIG. 33B).

As shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 33 (c), in the tubular member 4200 and the light irradiation device 4400, the tubular member 4200 faces the light irradiation device 4400 in the minor axis direction (FIG. 33 (b)). In (see), the tubular member 4200 is not in contact with the refracting member 4430, and in a state where the tubular member 4200 faces the light irradiation device 4400 in the major axis direction (see FIG. 33C), the refracting member 4430 has a tubular shape. The member 4200 is brought into contact with the member 4200 and the refraction member 4430 is arranged in a positional relationship in which the member 4230 is swung.

By swinging the refracting member 4430, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light sources 1421, 1423 of the light irradiation device 4400 is changed, and the outer shape of the light visually recognized in the front view is changed. Next, with reference to FIG. 34, an aspect of the refracting member 4430 before and after the swing and the path of the light emitted from the light sources 1421, 1423 will be described.

34 (a) and 34 (b) are top views of the base portion 1410 and the refracting member 4430 of the light irradiation device 4400. In addition, FIG. 34A shows a state in which the refracting member 4430 is in an inclined posture with respect to the base portion 1410 due to the elastic force of the coil spring arranged between one end of the refracting member 4430 and the base portion 1410. As shown in FIG. 34 (b), the refracting member 4430 is brought into contact with the tubular member 4200 to press the refracting member 4430 toward the base portion 1410, and the refracting member 4430 is in a posture parallel to the base portion 1410. The state to be said is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b), typical paths L41 and L42 of the light emitted from the light source 1420 are shown, and the outer shape of the tubular member 4200 is shown by a broken line.

As shown in FIG. 34, the refracting member 4430 includes a rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 4431, a claw portion 4432 formed at one end of the main body portion 4431, and a side opposite to one end on which the claw portion 4432 is formed. It includes a stopper portion 4433 formed at the end opposite to the base portion 1410, and is formed of a light-transmitting material. Examples of the light-transmitting material include resin materials such as PET, PC, and acrylic, and plate-shaped glass.

The main body portion 4431 is formed in a rectangular plate shape having a constant thickness. The claw portion 4432 is composed of a pair of portions (see FIG. 34 (a), one of which is shown) protruding from the side surface of the main body portion 4431 in a horseshoe shape. Each of the pair of horseshoe-shaped overhanging portions is slidably fitted onto a swing shaft extending in the vertical direction on the front side of the base portion 1410, whereby the refracting member 4430 is fitted to the base portion 1410. On the other hand, it is formed so as to be swingable in the horizontal direction.

The stopper portion 4433 is formed in a box shape having an opening on the base portion 1410 side, and is formed in a size capable of accommodating a coil spring on the inner peripheral side thereof, and the stopper portion 4433 is pressed against the base portion 1410. The main body portion of the refracting member 4430 and the base portion 1410 are projected to a height parallel to each other. In the state where the stopper portion 4433 is pressed against the base portion 1410, the coil spring is housed in the stopper portion 4433, and the overhanging end surface of the stopper portion 4433 comes into contact with the base portion 1410 (see FIG. 34 (b)).

The paths L41 and L42 of the light emitted from the light source 1421 will be described. As shown in FIG. 34 (a), when the refracting member 4430 is tilted with respect to the base portion 1410 without being pressed against the base portion 1410, it is the lower side of the light emitted from the light source 1421. The light passing through the path L41 has a shorter distance to reach the refraction member 4430 than the light passing through the upper path L42, and by passing through the refraction member 4430, the light passes in the left direction (downward in FIG. 34A). ) Is refracted.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), when the refracting member 4430 is pressed against the base portion 1410, the light emitted from the light source 1421 that passes through the lower path L41 also passes through the upper path L42. In both cases, the distance to reach the refracting member 4430 is the same, and the light emitted from the light source 1421 travels straight.

Therefore, the traveling direction of the light emitted toward the tubular member 4200 can be changed depending on the posture of the refracting member 4430. Here, since the change in the posture of the refracting member 4430 is linked with the change in the posture of the tubular member 4200 as described above, the change in the posture of the tubular member 4200 and the light emitted toward the tubular member 4200. Changes in the traveling direction (direction perpendicular to the axis) can be linked. Next, the mode of light visually recognized through the tubular member 4200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36.

35 and 36 are front views of the tubular member 4200 and the light irradiation device 4400. In addition, FIG. 35 shows a state in which the tubular member 4200 faces the light irradiation device 4400 in the minor axis direction (see FIG. 33B), and FIG. 36 shows a state in which the tubular member 4200 directs the light irradiation device in the major axis direction. The state toward the 4400 (see FIG. 33 (c)) is shown, and in FIGS. 35 and 36, the pattern of the light when the light emitted from the light source 1420 is visually recognized through the tubular member 4200 is shaded. Illustrated in.

As shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 35, when the minor axis direction of the tubular member 4200 is directed toward the light irradiation device 4400, the refraction member 4430 is tilted with respect to the base portion 1410 of the light irradiation device 4400. Since the refracting member 4430 takes an attitude, the light emitted from the light source 1421 (top of FIG. 33 (a)) and the light source 1423 (third from top of FIG. 33 (a)) in which the refracting member 4430 is arranged on the front side is emitted. , Refracted horizontally.

As described above, since the refracting members 4430 arranged in front of the light sources 1421, 1423 are formed in such a manner that they swing in opposite directions, the refraction direction of the light emitted from the light sources 1421, 1423 is different. Each is in the opposite direction. That is, since the refraction member 4430 arranged in front of the light source 1421 is swung around the right side in the front view (front side in FIG. 33A), the light emitted from the light source 1421 is on the right side in the front view. Be refracted. Further, since the refraction member 4430 arranged in front of the light source 1423 is swung around the left side in the front view (the back side in FIG. 33A), the light emitted from the light source 1423 is on the left side in the front view. Be refracted.

As a result, the pattern formed by the light emitted from the light source 1420 (see FIG. 33) of the light irradiation device 4400 is visually recognized as an S-shaped curve in front view through the tubular member 4200. This can be easily formed when the light source 1420 is arranged in a shape in which an S-shaped curve is drawn in advance (a shape corresponding to the pattern of light to be visually recognized), but the arrangement position of the light source 1420 is the base portion 1410. Since it depends on the design, it is often impossible to arrange the light source 1420 at a desired position.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by refracting the light emitted from the light source 1420 (see FIG. 33) by using the refracting member 4430, the pattern of the light that can be visually recognized without depending on the arrangement of the light source 1420. Can be designed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the light pattern visually recognized through the tubular member 4200 can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 33 (c) and 36, when the major axis direction of the tubular member 4200 is directed toward the light irradiation device 4400, the refraction member 4430 is pressed against the base portion 1410 of the light irradiation device 4400. Light source 1421 (top of FIG. 33 (a)) and light source 1423 (FIG. 33 (a)) in which the base portion 1410 and the main body portion 4431 of the refraction member 4430 are arranged in parallel and the refraction member 4430 is arranged on the front side. The light emitted from the third from the top) goes straight.

Here, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), in a state where the major axis direction of the tubular member 4200 is directed to the light irradiation device 4400, the inside of the thickened portion (major axis direction portion) of the tubular member 4200. , The part on the back side acts as a convex lens. Therefore, since the directivity of the light emitted from the light source 1420 is weak, the range in which the light emitted at a position away from the axis of the tubular member 4200 is emitted toward the front side surface of the tubular member 4200. Can be concentrated near the axis of the tubular member 4200.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36, the light can be concentrated near the axis of the tubular member 4200 in the front view. As a result, the light emitted from the light source 1420 in a state where the minor axis direction of the tubular member 4200 is directed to the light irradiation device 4400 is spread in the left-right direction and visually recognized, and the major axis direction of the tubular member 4200 is light. The difference in the shape (pattern) of the light in the horizontal direction (FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 in the left-right direction) is different in that the light emitted from the light source 1420 in the state of being directed to the irradiation device 4400 is focused near the axis. Can be increased, and the effect of changing the shape (pattern) of light visually recognized through the tubular member 4200 can be improved.

Here, since the swing angle of the refracting member 4430 is gradually changed from the state shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 35 to the state shown in FIGS. 33 (c) and 36, the swing angle of the refracting member 4430 is gradually changed. The pattern of light emitted from the light source 1420 (see FIG. 33) visually recognized through the tubular member 4200 is visually recognized in a manner of being gradually focused on the axis. That is, since the light pattern is not changed intermittently but is continuously changed, it is possible for the player to easily discriminate the change in the light pattern.

Here, the lateral peripheral lengths of the outer peripheral surfaces of the tubular member 4200 included in the acute-angled predetermined angle α shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 33 (c) are different from each other. That is, when visually recognizing from the major axis direction (see FIG. 33 (c)), the peripheral length of the outer peripheral surface at a predetermined angle α is larger than when visually recognizing from the minor axis direction (see FIG. 33 (b)). become longer.

Since the low transmittance portion 4230 on the outer peripheral side is formed at a constant inclination angle, the outer circumference can be visually recognized from the direction perpendicular to the axis by visually recognizing the peripheral length of the tubular member 4200 and the tubular member 4200 when the tubular member 4200 is rotated. The side low transmittance portion 4230 has a proportional relationship with the movement width that is visually recognized as being moved in the axial direction of the tubular member 4200.

Therefore, when the tubular member 4200 is rotated at a constant rotation speed, when the tubular member 4200 is rotated by a predetermined angle α from the state shown in FIG. 33 (b), the outer peripheral side low transparency that is visually recognized in the front view is low. When the tubular member 4200 is rotated by a predetermined angle α from the state of FIG. 33 (c), it is visually recognized in front view from the movement width in which the rate portion 4230 is moved in the axial direction of the tubular member 4200. The width of movement of the outer peripheral side low transmission rate portion 4230 in the axial direction of the tubular member 4200 is larger.

That is, even when the tubular member 4200 is rotated at a constant speed, the movement of the light visually recognized in such a manner that the tubular member 4200 is rotated in the axial direction of the tubular member 4200. The speed is not constant, and the movement speed is slow or slow. Therefore, even when the rotational speed of the tubular member 4200 is formed to be constant, the moving speed of the light can be changed, so that the effect of moving the visually recognized light can be effectively performed.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. In the light effect device 4000 of the fourth embodiment, the case where the tubular member 4200 has an elliptical cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis has been described, but in the light effect device 5000 of the fifth embodiment, the tubular member The case where the 5200 has an elliptical cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis and the elliptical major axis direction and the minor axis direction are switched at a predetermined position in the axial center direction will be described. The light effect device 5000 includes a light irradiation device 4400, but since the light irradiation device 4400 is as described above in the fourth embodiment, the description of the light irradiation device 4400 will be omitted and each embodiment will be omitted. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 37 (a) is a top view of the tubular member 5200, and FIG. 37 (b) is a front view of the tubular member 5200. As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the tubular member 5200 is provided with a sliding end portion 1211 externally fitted to the introduction cylinder 83 (see FIG. 6) at one end (upper side of FIG. 37 (b)). A diameter-expanded portion 1210 formed by expanding the diameter from one end to the other end (lower side in FIG. 37 (b)) and formed from a metal material, and the other of the diameter-expanded portion 1210. One end (upper side of FIG. 37 (b)) is fitted and fixed to the end, and one end extends from the other end to the other end (lower side of FIG. 37 (b)) which is the opposite end. It includes a main body 5220, which is provided and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material.

The main body portion 5220 is based on the main body portion 1220 (see FIGS. 5 and 6) in the first embodiment, and has a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis, which is a length Da in the major axis direction and a length Db (Da) in the minor axis direction. > Db) is formed in an elliptical shape with the outer circumference partially thickened. Further, when the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member 5200 is visually recognized while moving from one end to the other along the axis of the tubular member 5200, the major axis of the elliptical member 5200. The relationship between the direction and the minor axis direction is formed in such a manner that the relationship is exchanged at a position M intermediate in the axial direction of the main body portion 5220.

Further, the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 5220 is formed at substantially the same pitch as the low transmittance portion 1230, and is formed in a spiral shape inclined at a constant inclination angle at the axis of the main body portion 5220, and also transmits light. A low transmittance portion 4230 on the outer peripheral side is formed, which is formed to have a lower transmittance than other portions of the main body portion 5220.

Here, as described above in the first embodiment, the low transmittance portion 1230 (see FIG. 6) formed overhanging the inner peripheral surface of the tubular member 5200 is formed along the guide member 1300 (see FIG. 6). The tubular member 5200 is rotated by the contact of the flowing balls. Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40, changes in appearance when the tubular member 5200 is rotated will be described.

38 to 40 are views for explaining the process of rotating the tubular member 5200 in chronological order, and FIGS. 38 (a), 39 (a) and 40 (a) show the tubular member 5200 and It is a top view of the light irradiation device 4400, and FIGS. 38 (b), 39 (b) and 40 (b) are front views of the tubular member 5200 and the light irradiation device 4400. Note that FIGS. 38 (b), 39 (b) and 40 (b) show the appearance of the tubular member 5200 in which the light emitted from the light source 1420 is visually recognized through the tubular member 5200.

With respect to the tubular member 5200 and the light irradiation device 4400, when the tubular member 5200 faces the light irradiation device 4400 in the major axis direction, the stopper portion 4433 (see FIG. 34) presses against the base portion 1410 of the light irradiation device 4400. When the minor axis direction of the tubular member 5200 is directed toward the light irradiation device 4400, the tubular member 5200 and the refraction member 4430 are formed in a positional relationship so as not to be in contact with each other.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the upper side of the tubular member 5200 faces the light irradiation device 4400 in the minor axis direction and the lower side of the tubular member 5200 points in the major axis direction toward the light irradiation device 4400, the light irradiation device As the refracting member 4430 (see FIG. 34) arranged on the lower side of the 4400 is swung, the light is visually recognized on the lower side of the position M in a manner focused on the axis, and is on the upper side of the position M. In, the shape of the light is spread to the left and right in the shape of an S-shaped curve and is visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 39, when rotated 45 ° clockwise from top view from FIG. 38, the tubular member 5200 abuts on the refracting member 4430 (see FIG. 34) both above and below position M. , The refracting member 4430 takes an inclined posture with respect to the base portion 1410. Therefore, the light emitted from the light irradiating device 4400 is refracted by the refracting member 4430, and the outer shape of the light visually recognized through the tubular member 5200 in the front view is spread to the left and right in an S-shaped curve and visually recognized. Ru. In this case, the inclination angle of the refracting member 4430 with respect to the base portion 1410 is formed to be smaller than the inclination angle when the refracting member 4430 is not in contact with the tubular member 5200.

As shown in FIG. 40, when the tubular member 5200 is further rotated by 45 ° clockwise from the top view, the lower side of the tubular member 5200 points in the minor axis direction toward the light irradiation device 4400 and from the position M. The upper side is formed so that the major axis direction is directed toward the light irradiation device 4400. In this case, as the refraction member 4430 (see FIG. 34) arranged on the upper side of the light irradiation device 4400 is swung, the light is visually recognized in a mode in which the light is focused on the axis above the position M. On the lower side of the position M, the shape of the light is spread to the left and right in the shape of an S-shaped curve and is visually recognized. Therefore, the mode of change of the light pattern visually recognized through the tubular member 5200 in the front view is increased as compared with the case where the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis is formed into a constant elliptical shape (see FIG. 32). be able to.

Here, the swing angle of the refracting member 4430 varies from the state shown in FIG. 38 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 39 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 40 (b). Since it is gradually changed, the pattern of light emitted from the light source 1420 that is visually recognized through the tubular member 5200 is visually recognized in such a manner that it is gradually focused on the axis or gradually separated from the axis. .. That is, since the light pattern is not changed intermittently but is continuously changed, it is possible for the player to easily discriminate the change in the light pattern.

Further, the speed of movement of the light visually recognized in the mode of being moved in the axial direction of the tubular member 5200 with the position M as a boundary is emphasized. For example, when the tubular member 5200 is formed in a posture in which the minor axis direction thereof faces the light irradiation device 4400 above the position M (see FIG. 38 (a)), a predetermined angle α (see FIG. 38 (a)). The horizontal peripheral length of the outer peripheral surface of the tubular member 5200 included in) is longer at the lower side of the position M than at the upper side of the position M.

Therefore, when the tubular member 5200 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle α from the state shown in FIG. 38 (a), the outer peripheral side low transmittance portion 4230 is the axis of the tubular member 5200 in the front view. The movement width visually recognized in the mode of being moved in the central direction is larger on the lower side of the position M than on the upper side of the position M. That is, when the tubular member 5200 is rotated clockwise in the top view and the pattern of light visually recognized through the tubular member 5200 is visually recognized in such a manner that it is moved upward, the time in the state shown in FIG. 38 is shown. Before and after the target, the moving speed of light becomes slow with the position M as the boundary.

For example, when the tubular member 5200 is formed in a posture in which the major axis direction thereof faces the light irradiation device 4400 above the position M (see FIG. 40 (a)), a predetermined angle α (see FIG. 40 (a)). The horizontal peripheral length of the outer peripheral surface of the tubular member 5200 included in the above is longer on the upper side of the position M than on the lower side of the position M.

Therefore, when the tubular member 5200 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle α from the state shown in FIG. 40 (a), the outer peripheral side low transmittance portion 4230 is the axis of the tubular member 5200 in the front view. The movement width visually recognized in the mode of being moved in the central direction is larger on the upper side of the position M than on the lower side of the position M. That is, when the tubular member 5200 is rotated clockwise in the top view and the pattern of light visually recognized through the tubular member 5200 is visually recognized in such a manner that it is moved upward, the time in the state shown in FIG. 40 is shown. Before and after the target, the moving speed of light becomes rapid with the position M as the boundary.

Therefore, even when the rotational speed of the tubular member 5200 is formed to be constant, the moving speed of light can be further increased by switching the speed of movement of the tubular member 5200 in the axial direction at position M. It is possible to easily discriminate the change of.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

The pachinko machine 10 may be configured by combining or replacing some or all of the configurations of one of the above embodiments with some or all of the configurations of the other embodiments.

In the first embodiment, the case where the main body portion 1220 of the tubular member 1200 is formed in a tubular shape from a light-transmitting resin material has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, both ends of the tubular member may be formed. A bent plate-shaped panel wall material made of a light-transmitting resin material is fitted into a metal frame consisting of a pair of ring-shaped members to be formed and a plurality of connecting members connecting the ring-shaped members. The shape member 1200 may be configured so as to partially have a light transmitting portion. In this case, since the tubular member 1200 is rotated, the metallic connecting member shields the light emitted from the light irradiation device 1400, so that the pattern of the visible light can be changed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the decorative member 1500 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, a light-transmitting resin material is used for a metal frame. By fitting a flat plate-shaped panel wall material made of the above material, the panel wall material may be configured to partially have a light transmitting portion. In this case, even if the low transmittance portion 1511 is not formed on the decorative member 1500, the metal frame shields the light. Therefore, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 1400 is transmitted by the decorative member 1500 together with the light transmitting portion. Can be divided into.

In the first embodiment, the case where only one end of the tubular member 1200 is rotatably fitted to the introduction cylinder 83 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and both ends of the tubular member 1200 are not necessarily limited to this. It may be formed in a manner of axially supporting. In this case, in order to stabilize the rotation axis of the tubular member 1200, the force applied to the tubular member 1200 is effectively directed in the rotation direction. Therefore, the force required to rotate the tubular member 1200 can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, the case where the low transmittance portion 1230 of the tubular member 1200 and the low transmittance portion 1511 of the decorative member 1500 are formed overhanging is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the tubular member is tubular. The surfaces of the main body 1220 of the member 1200 and the main body 1510 of the decorative member 1500 may be formed in a stepless manner. In this case, a portion having a low light transmittance can be partially formed by applying a ground glass-like surface treatment or coating to the portions corresponding to the low transmittance portions 1230 and 1511. Then, for example, when the tubular member 1200 or the decorative member 1500 is formed from a resin material, even if there is a request to change the formation pattern of the low transmittance portions 1230 and 1511, if the shape of the member remains the same, The same mold can be used as it is to produce a tubular member 1200 or a decorative member 1500, and then surface processing or painting can be performed. Therefore, the production cost of the member can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the low transmittance portion 1511 of the decorative member 1500 is formed in a wavy shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the low transmittance portion 1511 is formed in a linear shape. Is also good. In this case, the light visually recognized in the mode of being moved in the axial direction of the tubular member 1200 by the rotation of the tubular member 1200 is visually recognized in the mode of being moved in the extending direction of the low transmittance portion 1511. Can be done.

In the first embodiment, the case where the tubular member 1200 is rotated by the weight of the sphere has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a drive source for rotating the tubular member 1200 is separately arranged. Is also good. In this case, for example, when the tubular member 1200 is rotated in such a manner that the descending speed of the low transmittance portion 1230 of the tubular member 1200 in the front view is faster than the flow velocity due to the own weight of the sphere, the sphere becomes a cylinder. It is pushed from above by the low transmittance portion 1230 of the shape member 1200. Then, the ball is accelerated as compared with the case where the ball flows down by its own weight, and the speed of the ball discharged from the lower end of the tubular member 1200 is increased. Here, since the player has the impression of a windmill that is rotated by the flow of the ball, there is a prejudice that the flow speed of the ball decreases when the ball comes into contact with a rotatable member. Therefore, the tubular member 1200 accelerates the speed of the ball, which can give the player an unexpected impression.

In the first embodiment, the case where the low transmittance portions 1511 are formed in a wavy shape in a plurality of rows has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the low transmittance portions 1511 are formed in a plurality of rows in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. It may be formed and formed in a grid pattern. In this case, the light can be further subdivided as compared with the case where the low transmittance portion 1511 is formed in a plurality of rows in a wavy shape (striped shape).

In the first embodiment, the case where the tubular member 1200 is fitted onto the introduction cylinder 83 fixed to the outer wall portion 82 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the tubular member 1200 is placed in the horizontal direction. It may be formed in a manner of being translated. In this case, even if the light irradiation device 1400 is fixed so as not to be movable, the relative positional relationship between the tubular member 1200 and the light irradiation device 1400 can be changed. That is, in the front view, the positional relationship between the tubular member 1200 and the output direction of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 1400 can be changed, and the strongly illuminated position of the tubular member 1200 can be horizontally moved. Therefore, the appearance visually recognized through the tubular member 1200 can be changed.

In the second embodiment, the case where the light irradiation device 2400 is swung by the collision of a sphere with the base portion 2410 of the light irradiation device 2400 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the light irradiation device is not necessarily limited to this. A drive source for swinging the 2400 may be separately arranged. In this case, since the light irradiation device 2400 can be swung regardless of whether or not the ball flows down, the player is interested even before the ball flows down in the vicinity of the light effect device 2000. It is possible to make the player aim the ball near the light effect device 2000.

In the third embodiment, the case where the low transmittance portion 3230 does not change the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the extension direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the low transmittance portion 3230 is oriented in the extension direction. It may be formed in such a manner that the widthwise dimension of the vertical cross-sectional shape periodically increases or decreases. In this case, when the tubular member 3200 is visually recognized in the front view, the low transmittance portion 3230 is visually recognized in such a manner that it becomes thicker or thinner along the extending direction, and the peripheral surface portion 3240 is also visually recognized as the low transmittance portion. It is visually recognized in a manner of becoming thicker or thinner along the extending direction of 3230. Therefore, the outer shape of the light visually recognized through the peripheral surface portion 3240 is also visually recognized in a manner of increasing or decreasing. Therefore, when the tubular member 3200 is rotated, the outer shape of the light visually recognized through the peripheral surface portion 3240 can be enlarged or reduced.

In the third embodiment, the case where the low transmittance portion 3230 is formed at a constant inclination angle with respect to the axis of the tubular member 3200 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the low transmittance portion 3230 is used. The tubular member 3200 may be formed so as to be extended while changing the inclination angle with respect to the axis. In this case, since the low transmittance portion 3230 is formed in a wavy shape in the front view of the tubular member 3200, when the tubular member 3200 is rotated, the light visually recognized through the tubular member 3200 is in the axial direction. It is visually recognized as being moved while moving up and down.

In the third embodiment, the case where the low transmittance portion 3230 is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the axial center of the tubular member 3200 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the low transmittance portion 3230 is the same. When the widthwise dimension of the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the extending direction is formed in a manner that periodically increases or decreases, the low transmittance portion 3230 may be formed in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member 3200. In this case, by rotating the tubular member 3200, the thickly formed portion and the thinly formed portion of the low transmittance portion 3230 are moved in the horizontal direction, and the outer shape of the light visually recognized through the peripheral surface portion 3240. Is visually recognized in a manner of increasing or decreasing. Therefore, when the tubular member 3200 is rotated, the outer shape of the light visually recognized through the peripheral surface portion 3240 can be enlarged or reduced.

In the third embodiment, the case where the low transmittance portion 3230 is formed overhanging the outer peripheral surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the groove formed on the outer peripheral surface in a semicircular shape. May be formed. In this case, the side surface of the tubular member 3200 including the groove recess is partially formed in a concave shape. Due to the action of the concave surface shape, the light is diffused and the groove portion is visually recognized darker than other peripheral surfaces, so that the light can be divided by the groove.

In the fourth embodiment, a mask is applied to the main body portion 4220 by attaching a tape to a portion other than the shape of the outer peripheral side low transmittance portion 4230, a paint having a low transmittance is sprayed, and the tape is applied after the paint has dried. Although the case where the outer peripheral side low transmittance portion 4230 is formed by peeling off is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the outer peripheral side low transmittance portion 4230 may be formed in a ground glass shape. In this case, when the main body portion 4220 of the tubular member 4200 is resin-molded, the outer peripheral side low transmittance portion 4230 can be formed at the same time, and the step of painting can be reduced. Therefore, the main body of the tubular member 4200 can be reduced. The production cost of the part 4220 can be suppressed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<An example of a technical idea that changes the pattern of light by rotating a tubular member>
A tubular member that is rotatably supported by a game board and has a light transmitting portion, and a light irradiating device that irradiates light toward the tubular member, and the tubular member has a light transmittance. A low transmittance portion that is formed on the peripheral surface of the tubular member and is formed in such a manner that the position visually recognized in one direction is changed by rotating the tubular member. A0 is characterized in that the light emitted from the light irradiating device is visually recognized through the tubular member.

According to the game machine A0, the pattern formed by the difference in the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member can be changed, and the effect of producing the light emitted from the light irradiating device can be improved. it can.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a diffusion member arranged on the game board and a light irradiation device arranged on the back side of the diffusion member are provided, and the light emitted from the light irradiation device is emitted. There is a gaming machine that is diffused by a diffusion member and illuminates a decorative member arranged on the front side of the diffusion member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-113910). However, in the conventional game machine described above, the mode in which the light emitted from the light irradiation device is visually recognized by the player is limited. That is, for example, the position where the diffusing member is illuminated is determined by the position of the light source of the light irradiation device, and the position where the diffusing member is illuminated (light pattern) does not change no matter how much the light emitting state of the light source is changed. Therefore, the mode of light visually recognized by the player is limited, and there is a problem that the effect of the light emitted from the light irradiation device is limited.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A0, the position of the low transmittance portion in one-way view is changed by rotating the tubular member. Therefore, the rotation of the tubular member changes the distribution of the degree of brightness of the light emitted from the light irradiator, which is visually recognized through the tubular member in one-way view. That is, since the pattern formed by the difference in the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member can be changedly formed, it is possible to increase the mode of producing the light emitted from the light irradiating device.

The fact that the tubular member has a light transmitting portion means that the tubular member has a portion that transmits light at least in a part. In this sense, the mode of the tubular member is not particularly limited. For example, the tubular member itself may be formed of a light-transmitting material, or the tubular member shields light from the light-transmitting material. It may be formed from the material to be used.

Examples of the material for forming the tubular member include glass and resin materials. For example, when a resin material is selected, a tubular member having the same shape can be mass-produced by manufacturing a molding die.

As an aspect of the low transmittance portion formed on the peripheral surface of the tubular member, when the transmittance is reduced by increasing the thickness on the peripheral surface of the tubular member, a curved surface is formed on the peripheral surface of the tubular member. Or concave surface is formed to reduce the transmittance by diffusing light, the peripheral surface of the tubular member is colored (for example, colored black) to reduce the transmittance, or surface processing (grooving, An example is a case where the transmittance is lowered by scattering light by (texturing, etc.).

It should be noted that maintaining the degree of brightness of the light means that the light transmitted through the member reaches the player's eyes sufficiently so that the brightness is not excessively impaired. When the degree is weakened, it means that the light transmitted through the member hardly reaches the eyes and is visually recognized in the dark.

In the game machine A0, the low transmittance portion is formed in a band shape inclined with respect to the axial center of the tubular member.

According to the game machine A1, in addition to the effect of the game machine A0, the low transmittance portion is formed in a band shape inclined with respect to the axial center of the tubular member. Therefore, for example, in front view, the tubular member Can be visually recognized by the player so that the low transmittance portion is moved in the axial direction by rotating. That is, the portion where the degree of light brightness is weakened (the portion where the low transmittance portion is formed) can be visually recognized as being moved in the axial direction, and at the same time, the portion where the degree of light brightness is weakened. It is possible to visually recognize the portion other than the peripheral surface portion where the degree of brightness of light is maintained so as to be moved in the axial direction. That is, since the player can visually recognize the light emitted to the tubular member so as to be moved in the axial direction of the tubular member without controlling the light source of the light irradiation device, the effect of the light irradiation device is produced. Can be improved.

For example, when the low transmittance portion is spirally formed on the peripheral surface of the tubular member, the light emitted to the tubular member is continuously moved in the same axial direction of the tubular member. Can be done. Further, by partially changing the inclination angle of the low transmittance portion, the moving speed of light can be partially changed even when the tubular member is rotated at the same speed.

Here, the inclination angle of the low transmittance portion of the tubular member means, for example, the angle formed by the axial center of the tubular member and the low transmittance portion that intersects the axial center in front view.

In the game machine A1, the low transmittance portion disposed on one side surface of the tubular member on the side close to the light irradiation device and the side surface opposite to the one side surface of the tubular member. When the low transmittance portion arranged on the other side surface is visually recognized from the opposite side of the light irradiation device with the tubular member sandwiched at least, the tubular member can be visually recognized in an intersected manner. A game machine A2 characterized in that it is formed in.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the light emitted from the light irradiation device to the tubular member can be subdivided.

The light emitted from the light irradiator to the tubular member is first divided by a low transmittance portion formed on one side surface, and then divided by a low transmittance portion formed on the other side surface. That is, the light is split on both one side and the other side. Therefore, the light emitted from the light irradiating device to the tubular member can be subdivided, and the number of lights visible through the tubular member can be increased without increasing the light source of the light irradiating device.

Here, the division of light is visually recognized in such a manner that the portion where the degree of brightness of light is maintained is divided at the low transmittance portion which is the portion where the degree of brightness of light is weakened. Means that.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the game machine A3 is characterized in that the low transmittance portion is formed in a spiral shape.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1 or A2, the low transmittance portion is formed in a spiral shape. Therefore, for example, in front view, the low transmittance portion is formed by rotating the tubular member. Can be visually recognized by the player so that is continuously moved in the same axial direction.

For example, in the case where low transmittance portions are formed up to both ends of the tubular member, if both ends of the tubular member are hidden invisible, it is as if one of the hidden both ends. It is possible to produce an effect in which light is generated from an end portion and moves to the other end portion, which is the opposite end portion.

In any of the game machines A1 to A3, the low transmittance portion is formed so as to project from the peripheral surface of the tubular member in the radial direction of the tubular member and extends along the peripheral surface of the tubular member. In a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the extending direction of the tubular member, at least one side surface of both side surfaces connected to the peripheral surface of the tubular member has a curved surface shape recessed toward the peripheral surface side of the tubular member. A game machine A4 characterized by being formed.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A3, the brightness of the light passing through the tubular member is suppressed while suppressing the increase in the material cost required for forming the low transmittance portion. It is possible to emphasize the change in the strength of the degree of.

Here, when the light transmittance is lowered by increasing the thickness of the peripheral surface of the tubular member, a considerable thickness is required for the low transmittance portion in order to adjust the intensity of the light with other parts. , The material cost of the tubular member increases.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A3, the side surface of the low transmittance portion is formed in a curved surface shape recessed toward the peripheral surface side of the tubular member. That is, a concave shape is formed at the intersection of the side surface of the low transmittance portion and the peripheral surface of the tubular member, and the light incident on the side surface of the low transmittance portion is diffused by the action of the concave surface shape. Therefore, even if the low transmittance portion is not provided with a considerable thickness, the light emitted to the side surface of the low transmittance portion is diffused, and the light is visually recognized in a state in which the degree of brightness of the light is weakened. As a result, the degree of light brightness is changed between the light that is visually recognized by passing through the concave side surface of the low transmittance portion and the light that is visually recognized by passing through the other portion, and the brightness of the light is changed. The strength of the degree of can be emphasized. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the effect of forming strength and weakness in the brightness of the light passing through the tubular member while suppressing the increase in the material cost.

In the game machine A4, the low transmittance portion is provided with an overhanging end at an overhanging end, and both side surfaces are connected via the overhanging end portion and both side surfaces are recessed toward the peripheral surface side of the tubular member. A game machine A5 characterized in that it is formed in a curved surface shape.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the effect of subdividing the irradiated light can be improved. That is, the light passing through both side surfaces of the low transmittance portion is diffused by the action of the concave surface shape, and the degree of brightness of the visible light is weakened, while the light passing through the overhanging end portion connecting both side surfaces. Maintains the brightness of the visible light.

In this case, a plurality of parts (both sides) that are visually recognized in a state where the degree of light brightness is weakened can be independently formed in one low transmittance part, and as a result, the light brightness can be reduced. It is possible to increase the number of parts that are visually recognized as parts with a strong degree. That is, among the low transmittance parts, the overhanging end part can be a part where the degree of light brightness is stronger than that of both side surfaces, thereby improving the effect of subdividing the irradiated light. Can be done.

In any of the game machines A0 to A5, the low transmittance portion is formed in a spiral shape, and the tubular member includes a peripheral surface portion formed between adjacent low transmittance portions, and the peripheral surface portion thereof. A game machine A6 characterized in that a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the circumferential direction is formed into a concave shape.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A0 to A5, it is possible to easily determine the boundary of the light divided by the low transmittance portion.

Here, even if the peripheral surface portion sandwiched between the adjacent low transmittance portions is not formed in a concave shape, the light emitted from the light irradiating device is visually recognized through the low transmittance portion, so that the light is divided. Will be done. However, in this case, since the light emitted from the light irradiating device is visually recognized as if the pattern of the light is cut as it is, it is difficult to visually recognize the light as being independent of each other.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A6, when the light emitted from the light irradiation device is visually recognized through the tubular member, the light is formed between the adjacent low transmittance portions due to the action of the concave surface portion of the peripheral surface portion. It is visually recognized in a reduced manner on the peripheral surface. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the low transmittance portion and the peripheral surface portion of the tubular member adjacent to the low transmittance portion in a state where the light is focused toward the inside of the peripheral surface portion. It is possible to easily determine the boundary of the divided light.

The portion surrounded by the low transmittance portion means, for example, a portion surrounded by the low transmittance portion on the front side and the low transmittance portion on the back side of the tubular member in front view.

In any of the game machines A3 to A6, the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis expands as the tubular member approaches from one end to the other end, which is the opposite end of one end. A game machine A7 characterized in that it is formed in a diameterd manner.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A3 to A6, the tubular member is formed in a manner in which the diameter is increased as it approaches the other end, for example. The area of the portion surrounded by the low transmittance portion in the front view is larger on the other end side than on the one end side. Therefore, for example, when the light is visually recognized to be moved from one end of the tubular member to the other end by rotating the tubular member, it is surrounded by a low transmittance portion. The light that is subdivided into the divided areas and visually recognized is visually recognized in a gradually enlarged manner. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect of enlarging or reducing the light without controlling the light source of the light irradiation device.

In any of the game machines A0 to A6, the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member is formed with an elliptical outer circumference, and the thickness of the elliptical wall surface is from the end in the major axis direction to the minor axis direction. A game machine A8 characterized in that it is suppressed toward the end of the game.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A0 to A6, the tubular member is formed in an elliptical shape, and the thickness of the elliptical wall surface is from the end in the major axis direction to the minor axis direction. Since it is suppressed toward the end, a convex lens shape is formed at both ends in the major axis direction of the tubular member. Therefore, when light is irradiated from the major axis direction of the tubular member, the light is focused near the axial center of the tubular member. Therefore, when light is emitted from the major axis direction of the tubular member, the pattern of light that is visually recognized through the tubular member from the opposite side of the light source that irradiates the light across the tubular member is the axial center of the tubular member. It can be focused in the vicinity.

In the game machine A8, the relationship between the major axis direction and the minor axis direction in the elliptical cross section of the tubular member is maintained up to a position of a predetermined distance from one end of the tubular member, and from the one end. The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that it is inverted on the other end side beyond the position of a predetermined distance.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of the game machine A8, the change in the degree of light collection near the axis of the tubular member is reversed at a position at a predetermined distance from one end of the tubular member. be able to.

That is, with respect to a predetermined distance from one end of the tubular member, a change in the outer shape of the tubular member in front view, for example, between one end side of the tubular member and the other end side of the tubular member. Is reversed. For example, when the direction of the tubular member that matches the direction of the player's line of sight on one end side of the tubular member is changed from the major axis direction to the minor axis direction, the other end of the tubular member On the side, the direction of the tubular member that matches the direction of the player's line of sight is changed from the minor axis direction to the major axis direction.

Therefore, the change in the degree to which the light is focused near the axial center of the tubular member can be reversed at a predetermined distance from one end of the tubular member, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

<An example of the technical idea of tilting the output direction of the light source in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member>
In any of the game machines A0 to A9, the output direction or the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light irradiation device is mutably formed in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member. Game machine B1.

According to the game machine B1, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A0 to A9, the effect of the tubular member is produced by changing the light output direction or the traveling direction in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member. The effect can be improved.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a diffusion member arranged on the game board and a light irradiation device arranged on the back side of the diffusion member are provided, and the light emitted from the light irradiation device is emitted. There is a gaming machine that is diffused by a diffusion member and illuminates a decorative member arranged on the front side of the diffusion member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-113910). However, in the conventional game machine described above, the mode in which the light emitted from the light irradiation device is visually recognized by the player is limited. That is, for example, the position where the diffusing member is illuminated is determined by the position of the light source of the light irradiation device, and the position where the diffusing member is illuminated (light pattern) does not change no matter how much the light emitting state of the light source is changed. Therefore, the mode of light visually recognized by the player is limited, and there is a problem that the effect of the light emitted from the light irradiation device is limited.

Therefore, the applicant of the present application has arranged a tubular member on the front side of the light irradiation device in addition to the above-mentioned gaming machine, and a pattern is formed by the difference in the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member. , A gaming machine has been developed in which the visible pattern is changed by the rotation of the tubular member, and the way the tubular member shines is changed (not known at the time of filing the application of the present application). However, in this case, for example, when the output direction of the light emitted from the light irradiating device is formed to be constant, the light of the pattern formed by the difference in the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member. It is not possible to significantly change the position or range in which the degree of brightness is strongly visible or the position or range in which the degree of brightness is weakly visible. Therefore, there is a problem that the mode of producing the tubular member is limited.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A0 to A9, the output direction or the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light irradiation device is perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member. Since it is formed so as to be changeable on a flat surface, it is possible to change the position where the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member is most strongly recognized, for example, along the direction perpendicular to the axis in the front view. Therefore, even when the output direction of the light emitted from the light irradiation device is formed to be constant, the brightness of the light is formed by the difference in the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member. The position or range in which the degree of lightness is strongly visually recognized or the position or range in which the degree of lightness is weakly visually recognized can be greatly changed, and the mode of effect of the tubular member can be increased.

The output direction of light means the direction in which the luminous intensity of light is the strongest before the irradiated light is bent by refraction or the like, and the traveling direction of light is the direction in which the luminous intensity of the irradiated light is strongest. Means the direction in which light travels while being bent by refraction or the like.

In the game machine B1, the game machine B2 is characterized in that the low transmittance portion is formed in a spiral shape.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the light emitted from the light irradiation device to the tubular member is moved in the axial direction of the tubular member by rotating the tubular member. Since it can be visually recognized by the player, the action of moving the light in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member and the ability to visually recognize the player so that the light is moved in the axial direction of the tubular member. Due to the synergistic effect of, the player can visually recognize the light as if it were moved up, down, left and right.

In the game machine B1 or B2, the light irradiation device includes a plurality of light sources for irradiating light and a base portion to which the plurality of light sources are fixed, and the base portion can swing with respect to the tubular member. A game machine B3 characterized in that it is formed in.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, the change in the posture of the member that moves the light in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member can be minimized.

That is, when another member for changing the traveling direction of light is arranged between the light irradiation device and the tubular member and the posture of the other member is changed to change the traveling direction of light, the other member is light. Since it is arranged closer to the tubular member than the irradiation device, it is necessary to change the posture of another member at a swing angle larger than the swing angle that directly changes the light output direction of the light source.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, the base portion to which the light source of the light irradiation device is fixed is formed so as to be swingable, so that the tubular member and the traveling direction of the light ( Alternatively, a sufficient distance can be taken from the position where the output direction is changed. Therefore, it is possible to secure the moving distance of the light tubular member in the direction perpendicular to the axis while suppressing the swing angle of the base portion.

The game machine B1 or B2 includes a refracting member formed between the tubular member and the light irradiating device so as to be able to refract the light emitted from the light irradiating device toward the tubular member. The irradiating device includes a plurality of light sources for irradiating light and a base portion to which the plurality of light sources are fixed, and the refraction member is arranged on the tubular member side of the plurality of light sources and described above. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that it is formed so as to be swingable in a direction perpendicular to an axis of a tubular member.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, the refracting members arranged in the plurality of light sources of the light irradiation device are formed so as to be swingable, so that the light irradiation device emits light. The traveling direction of light can be changed by swinging the refracting member. In this case, since the refracting members are individually arranged, it is possible to arbitrarily select which refracting member to swing depending on the design of the refracting member. That is, since it is possible to select from which light source the traveling direction of the light emitted is changed, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in producing the light of the light irradiation device.

For example, when a plurality of light sources of a light irradiation device are arranged along the axial direction of a tubular member, if all the light sources are swung in the same direction at the same angle, the degree of light brightness is the highest. The strongly visible area is translated in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member. Further, for example, when a plurality of light sources of the light irradiation device are arranged along the axial direction of the tubular member, if the adjacent light sources are swung in the opposite directions, the degree of brightness of the light is the highest. The strongly visible region is formed so as to be visually recognized in the shape of an S-shaped curve.

In the game machine B4, the tubular member has a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axial center, and the distance from the axial center is shorter than the distance from the axial center of the tubular member to the refracting member. It is formed in an elliptical shape having a major axis having a diameter longer than the radial direction, and by directing the major axis direction toward the refracting member, the tubular member and the refracting member are brought into contact with each other, and the refracting member swings. A game machine B5 characterized in that it can be formed as possible.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, when the tubular member is rotated and the refracting member is directed in the minor axis direction, the refracting member and the minor axis direction are separated from each other, so that the refracting member exerts a force. The refracting member remains stationary without being affected. On the other hand, when the refracting member is oriented in the major axis direction, the refracting member and the major axis direction are brought into contact with each other, so that the refracting member is swung. Therefore, the rotation of the tubular member is used to change the pattern formed by the intensity of the brightness of the light visually recognized on the peripheral surface of the tubular member, and the refraction member is swung to change the traveling direction of the light. It can also be used for changing purposes.

Examples of the shape of the tubular member having the minor axis direction and the major axis direction include an elliptical shape, a star shape, a keyhole shape, and a long rod shape.

In any of the game machines B1 to B5, the drive source required to change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light irradiating device is the kinetic energy of the ball flowing down the game board. Machine B6.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B5, it is not necessary to dispose a drive source for changing the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light irradiation device. The number of arrangements can be suppressed.

As a mode of changing the traveling direction of light by the kinetic energy of the sphere, the light irradiating device is shaken by the sphere directly colliding with the light irradiating device, or the sphere is a member other than the light irradiating device. When a sphere collides with a certain tubular member and the kinetic energy of the sphere acts indirectly on the change in the traveling direction of the light by changing the traveling direction of the light of the light irradiation device by rotating the tubular member. Examples thereof include a case where a tubular member collided with a sphere comes into contact with a refracting member that refracts light and changes the posture of the refracting member.

<An example of the technical idea of rotating a tubular member with the kinetic energy of a sphere>
In any one of the game machines A0 to A9 and B1 to B6, the tubular member is rotated by transmitting the kinetic energy of a ball flowing down the game board.

According to the game machine C1, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A0 to A9 and B1 to B6, it is not necessary to separately prepare a drive source for driving the tubular member, so that the drive for rotating the tubular member is not required. The power cost required to operate the source (eg, drive motor) can be reduced.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a diffusion member arranged on the game board and a light irradiation device arranged on the back side of the diffusion member are provided, and the light emitted from the light irradiation device is emitted. There is a gaming machine that is diffused by a diffusion member and illuminates a decorative member arranged on the front side of the diffusion member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-113910). However, in the conventional game machine described above, the mode in which the light emitted from the light irradiation device is visually recognized by the player is limited. That is, for example, the position where the diffusing member is illuminated is determined by the position of the light source of the light irradiation device, and the position where the diffusing member is illuminated (light pattern) does not change no matter how much the light emitting state of the light source is changed. Therefore, the mode of light visually recognized by the player is limited, and there is a problem that the effect of the light emitted from the light irradiation device is limited.

Therefore, the applicant of the present application has arranged a tubular member on the front side of the light irradiation device in addition to the above-mentioned gaming machine, and a pattern is formed by the difference in the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member. , A gaming machine has been developed in which the visible pattern is changed by the rotation of the tubular member, and the way the tubular member shines is changed (not known at the time of filing the application of the present application). However, for example, in the case of a structure in which a tubular member is rotated by a drive motor, there is a problem that the power cost of the drive motor that rotates the tubular member is extra.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the tubular member is rotated by the kinetic energy of the ball flowing down the game board. Therefore, since a drive motor for rotating the tubular member is not required, the power cost required for rotating the tubular member can be reduced.

Further, the tubular member can be installed in a space-saving manner because the drive motor is not arranged. That is, the space for arranging the accessory such as the tubular member on the front side of the game board or the back side of the game board is limited to a certain range, but the drive motor for rotating the tubular member does not need to be arranged. The usable space can be utilized as a space for arranging other moving accessories. Therefore, the degree of freedom in disposing of other moving accessories can be improved.

In a mode in which the tubular member is rotated by the kinetic energy of the sphere, a portion extending in the radial direction is formed on the side surface of the tubular member, and the overhanging portion is pushed by the flowing ball to rotate the tubular member. And a mode in which the tubular member is rotated by the collision of a sphere with the tubular member.

The game machine C1 includes a guide member that allows the ball to flow down along a predetermined path along the side surface of the tubular member, and the low transmittance portion projects in a band shape on the side surface on the side where the ball is flown down by the guide member. The gaming machine C2 is formed in a spiral shape along the peripheral surface of the tubular member and is formed at a position where it comes into contact with a ball flowing down by the guide member.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, a ball flowing down along a guide member in a predetermined path comes into contact with the low transmittance portion of the tubular member, and the ball pushes the low transmittance portion. In the embodiment, the tubular member is rotated. Therefore, since the force is continuously applied from the sphere to the tubular member while the sphere flows down, the tubular member can be continuously rotated, and the effect of the light irradiation device can be improved.

In the game machine C2, the low transmittance portion has a bent portion in which the magnitude of the inclination angle with respect to the axial center of the tubular member is changed.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the rotation speed of the tubular member can be changed with the bent portion as a boundary.

Here, when the tubular member is rotated by pushing the low transmittance portion of the tubular member by the sphere, the tubular member is rotated by the weight of the sphere, so that the sphere gives the tubular member to the tubular member. The force applied is less likely to fluctuate, and the rotational speed of the tubular member is likely to be kept constant. Therefore, the effect of rotating the tubular member tends to be monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C3, since the inclination angle of the low transmission rate portion of the tubular member is changed at the bent portion, the ball is a cylinder before and after the change of the inclination angle of the low transmission rate portion. Since the rotation angle of the tubular member is different when the outer peripheral surface of the shaped member flows down a predetermined distance in the axial direction, if the flow speed of the sphere is the same, before and after the inclination angle of the low transmission rate portion changes. Then, the rotation speed of the tubular member is changed. For example, when the flow speeds of the spheres in the vertical direction are the same, the rotation speed of the tubular member decreases as the inclination angle of the low transmittance portion decreases.

Therefore, the rotation speed of the tubular member can be changed even when the speed change of the sphere is unlikely to occur because the tubular member is rotated by the weight of the sphere to be abutted. Thereby, the rotation speed of the tubular member that can be formed can be increased.

In addition, even in a situation where the position of the flowing sphere is difficult to see, the change in the rotational speed of the tubular member can be confirmed by associating the position of the flowing sphere with the timing of the change in the rotational speed of the tubular member. You can check the position where the ball is flowing down with. For example, if the low transmittance portion is formed in such a manner that the inclination angle of the low transmittance portion is changed immediately before the sphere is discharged from the tubular member, when does the rotation speed of the tubular member change? By checking, it is possible to confirm the timing at which the ball is discharged from the end of the tubular member.

In the game machine C2 or C3, the game machine C4 is characterized in that the guide member is deformably formed in a direction away from the tubular member.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2 or C3, when the tubular member temporarily becomes non-rotatable for some reason, even if the ball does not flow down and is stopped, the guide member By being deformed in the direction away from the tubular member, the flow of the ball is restarted, and the game can be continuously performed accordingly.

That is, if the tubular member becomes non-rotatable for some reason, the ball flowing down along the guide member is stopped by being brought into contact with the low transmittance portion, so that the ball does not flow down and the game can be continued. It becomes difficult.

Normally, it is necessary to stop the game here and repair the game machine. However, when the spheres are further guided by the guide member, a large load is applied to the guide member due to the accumulation of a plurality of spheres on the guide member. Then, the guide member is deformed in the direction away from the tubular member, the distance between the side surface of the tubular member and the guide member is secured, the sphere is dropped from between the low transmittance portion and the guide member, and the flow of the sphere is restarted. Therefore, the game can be continued.

Examples of the case where the guide member can be deformed by an overload include a case where the guide member is made of elastic rubber and a case where the guide member is made of a thin metal plate.

In any of the game machines C2 to C4, the tubular member of the tubular member in which the guide member passes through the axis of the tubular member and intersects a plane orthogonal to the output direction of light emitted from the light irradiation device. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that it is arranged so as to face at least one side surface of the pair of side surface portions.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C2 to C4, the guide member is arranged at a position separated from the output direction of the light emitted from the light irradiation device, so that the light irradiation is performed. It is possible to reduce the influence of the light emitted from the device being shielded by the guide member and the sphere flowing down along the guide member.

Here, for example, when the light emitted from the light irradiation device is emitted at a position deviated from the axial center of the tubular member, the distances between each of the pair of side surface portions and the light output direction are different. However, since the guide member is arranged so as to face the side surface portion that is farther away from the light output direction, the light emitted from the light irradiation device flows down along the guide member and the guide member. The effect of shading by the sphere can be reduced.

Further, for example, when a low transmittance portion is formed on the outer peripheral side of the tubular member and a guide member is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the tubular member, the guide member is provided on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member. Since it is not necessary to dispose of the light, it is possible to further reduce the influence of the light emitted from the light irradiating device toward the tubular member in the front view being shielded by the guide member and the sphere flowing down along the guide member.

In the game machine C1, the tubular member includes a transmission portion formed so as to project from a peripheral surface and at a position where a flowing ball can collide, and the transmission portion is a surface on which the flowing ball collides. The gaming machine C6 is characterized by having a collision surface formed so as to be inclined with respect to the axial center of the tubular member.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the collision surface of the transmission portion collided with the ball is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the axial center of the tubular member, so that the ball is formed in the transmission portion. The force generated at the time of collision can be effectively applied in the rotation direction of the tubular member.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a diffusion member arranged on the game board and a light irradiation device arranged on the back side of the diffusion member are provided, and the light emitted from the light irradiation device is emitted. There is a gaming machine that is diffused by a diffusion member and illuminates a decorative member arranged on the front side of the diffusion member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-113910). However, in the conventional game machine described above, the mode in which the light emitted from the light irradiation device is visually recognized by the player is limited. That is, for example, the position where the diffusing member is illuminated is determined by the position of the light source of the light irradiation device, and the position where the diffusing member is illuminated (light pattern) does not change no matter how much the light emitting state of the light source is changed. Therefore, the mode of light visually recognized by the player is limited, and there is a problem that the effect of the light emitted from the light irradiation device is limited.

Therefore, the applicant of the present application has arranged a tubular member on the front side of the light irradiation device in addition to the above-mentioned gaming machine, and a pattern is formed by the difference in the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member. , A gaming machine has been developed in which the visible pattern is changed by the rotation of the tubular member, and the way the tubular member shines is changed (not known at the time of filing the application of the present application). However, in this case, for example, when the strip-shaped overhang portion formed on the side surface of the tubular member is abutted against the flowing sphere and is formed by the mechanism of being rotated by the own weight of the sphere, the sphere is formed of the tubular member. The flow speed is suppressed (decelerated) by abutting against the strip-shaped overhanging portion formed on the side surface, and after that, the weight of the ball and the tubular shape do not depend on the flow speed of the ball when it reaches the tubular member. Due to the suspension relationship with the friction in the rotational direction of the member, the sphere flows down at a substantially constant velocity. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to greatly change the rotation speed of the tubular member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, when the ball collides with the transmission part, kinetic energy of a different magnitude is transmitted to the tubular member through the transmission part depending on the speed of the flowing ball. Since the tubular member is rotated in the direction perpendicular to the axis by the kinetic energy, the speed at which the tubular member rotates can be changed by changing the speed of the flowing sphere.

In the game machine C6, a plurality of the transmission portions are formed, and the plurality of transmission portions exert a rotational force that causes the tubular member to rotate in one rotation direction by colliding with a flowing ball. A rotation in which the collision surface is formed in a manner generated in the member and a rotation in which the tubular member is rotated in the opposite direction of one rotation direction by being collided with a flowing sphere. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that at least one on which the collision surface is formed is arranged in a manner in which a force is generated on the tubular member.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, when the ball collides with the transmission portion, the tubular member is rotatably formed in one or the other direction. Therefore, it is possible to form the direction of change of the pattern formed by the intensity of the brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member in both directions.

It should be noted that the method of the collided surface is that the collided surface is formed in such a manner that the tubular member is generated by a rotational force that causes the tubular member to rotate in one direction of rotation by being collided with a flowing ball. It means that the collision surface is formed in such a manner that the normal line extending to the side facing the flowing sphere is directed in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation of one of the tubular members. To do.

Further, it is collided with the collided surface formed in such a manner that the tubular member generates a rotational force for rotating the tubular member in one direction of rotation by being collided with the flowing sphere, and the flowing sphere. As a result, the collision surface formed in a manner in which the tubular member is generated with a rotational force that causes the tubular member to rotate in the opposite direction of one rotation direction to the other rotation direction is formed in a single transmission portion. It may be formed.

In the game machine C6 or C7, the game machine C8 is characterized in that the transmission portion is formed on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of the game machine C6 or C7, the space required for the tubular member to rotate can be minimized.

Here, when the transmission portion is formed on the outer peripheral side of the tubular member, on the trajectory of the transmission portion formed when the tubular member rotates in order to avoid collision between the transmission portion of the tubular member and other members. It is necessary to form a space in. Therefore, the space for arranging the tubular member becomes large, and the space for arranging other accessories is suppressed accordingly.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6 or C7, a transmission portion for rotating the tubular member by the collision force of the ball is formed on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member. The space for arranging the shaped members is suppressed, and accordingly, a large space for arranging other accessories can be secured.

In any of the game machines C6 to C8, the transmission portion is a rotational force that causes the tubular member to rotate in one direction of rotation by colliding with a flowing ball in the vicinity of the side surface of the tubular member. Is formed on the tubular member, while at a position separated from the side surface of the tubular member, the tubular member is collided with a flowing ball in the direction opposite to one of the rotational directions. The gaming machine C9 is formed in such a manner that a rotational force for rotating in a certain other rotational direction is generated in the tubular member.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C6 to C8, the rotation speed and the rotation direction of the tubular member can be changed depending on where the ball collides with the transmission portion. As a result, the movement of the tubular member can be made more irregular.

The tubular member is rotated by the force applied when it collides with the sphere. Here, for example, when applying a force in the rotational direction to a rotatably formed tubular member, the tubular member is subjected to a position away from the axial center rather than a force applied to the tubular member at a position closer to the axial center. When a force is applied, the rotational torque applied to the tubular member becomes larger, and the rotational speed of the tubular member can be increased.

That is, for example, when the transmission portion is formed on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member, when a sphere collides with the transmission portion near the side surface of the tubular member, a large rotational torque is generated in the tubular member, and the tubular member is generated. Is rotated at a high speed in one direction of rotation. On the other hand, when the sphere collides with the transmission portion near the axis of the tubular member, the rotational torque generated in the tubular member becomes small, and the rotational speed at which the tubular member is rotated in the other rotation direction becomes small. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect of changing the rotation direction and rotation speed of the tubular member depending on the position at which the sphere collides with the transmission portion of the tubular member. Therefore, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the tubular member can be made irregular.

<An example of a technical idea that changes the direction of light movement depending on the pattern of the decorative member>
In any of the game machines A0 to A9, B1 to B6, or C1 to C9, a decorative member is provided which is arranged in a manner of shielding the tubular member and has a light transmitting portion, and the decorative member transmits light. A portion having low transmittance, which has a low transmittance portion which is formed in a plurality of rows and extends in a strip shape along a direction inclined with respect to the axial center of the tubular member, and is the tubular member. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the low transmittance portion is formed in a spiral shape along the peripheral surface of the tubular member.

According to the game machine D1, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A0 to A9, B1 to B6, or C1 to C9, the light emitted toward the tubular member is directed to the axial center of the tubular member. It can be visually recognized by the player in a mode of being moved in the inclined direction.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a diffusion member arranged on the game board and a light irradiation device arranged on the back side of the diffusion member are provided, and the light emitted from the light irradiation device is emitted. There is a gaming machine that is diffused by a diffusion member and illuminates a decorative member arranged on the front side of the diffusion member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-113910). However, in the conventional game machine described above, the mode in which the light emitted from the light irradiation device is visually recognized by the player is limited. That is, for example, the position where the diffusing member is illuminated is determined by the position of the light source of the light irradiation device, and the position where the diffusing member is illuminated (light pattern) does not change no matter how much the light emitting state of the light source is changed. Therefore, the mode of light visually recognized by the player is limited, and there is a problem that the effect of the light emitted from the light irradiation device is limited.

Therefore, the applicant of the present application has arranged a tubular member on the front side of the light irradiation device in addition to the above-mentioned gaming machine, and a pattern is formed by the difference in the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member. , A gaming machine has been developed in which the visible pattern is changed by the rotation of the tubular member, and the way the tubular member shines is changed (not known at the time of filing the application of the present application). However, in this case, it is suitable to visually recognize the light as if it is moved in the axial direction or the direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member, but for example, it is visually recognized that the light is moved in the direction inclined to the axial center. It had the problem that it was difficult to make it.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, a plurality of rows of low-transmittance portions are formed on the decorative member arranged in a manner of shielding the tubular member so as to be inclined to the axial center of the tubular member. Light that is visually recognized in a mode in which the low transmittance portion of the tubular member is moved in the axial direction of the tubular member due to the rotation of the member and is moved in the axial direction of the tubular member. It can be visually recognized by the player in a manner of being moved along the low transmittance portion of the decorative member.

Further, the low transmittance portion of the decorative member allows the light visually recognized through the decorative member to be divided into each low transmittance portion, and the light can be subdivided. As a result, the effect of producing the light emitted from the light irradiation device can be improved.

The low transmittance portion of the decorative member is partially roughened to scatter light to reduce the transmittance, is partially thickened, or is partially formed into a concave lens shape. Cases and the like are exemplified.

The fact that the decorative member has a light transmitting portion means that the decorative member has a portion that transmits light at least in a part. In this sense, the mode of the decorative member is not particularly limited, and for example, the decorative member itself may be formed of a light-transmitting material, and the decorative member includes a light-transmitting material and a material that shields light. May be formed from.

In the game machine D1, the cross-sectional shape of the decorative member in a plane perpendicular to the extending direction of the low transmittance portion of the decorative member is such that the low transmittance portions of the plurality of rows of the decorative member are adjacent to each other. A game machine D2 characterized in that it is formed in a concave shape between the transmittance portions.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the effect of subdividing the light by the adjacent low transmittance portions can be made remarkable.

Here, for example, as a method of changing the direction visually recognized as the direction in which light is moved from the axial direction of the tubular member to the direction inclined with respect to the axial center of the tubular member, the tubular member There is a method of shielding with a plate having an elongated hole-shaped opening inclined with respect to the axial direction of the above. However, in this case, since the light is diffracted near the boundary of the opening, the light visually recognized through the opening is wider than the area of the opening and is easily recognized. Therefore, for example, when a plurality of rows of elongated hole-shaped openings are formed, the distance between the close ends of the light visually recognized from the openings is narrower than the distance between the close ends of the adjacent openings. Therefore, it becomes difficult to determine the light boundary for each aperture.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D2, the cross-sectional shape between the adjacent low-transmittance portions of the decorative member is formed in a concave shape, so that the light visually recognized through the concave-shaped portion is affected by the concave shape. Therefore, it is visually recognized in a mode of being reduced in the direction of connecting the adjacent low transmittance portions. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine the boundary of the light divided by the low transmittance unit.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the decorative member is extended in a manner intersecting the low transmittance portion of the decorative member formed in a plurality of rows, and the width direction of the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the extending direction. D3 is a gaming machine D3, which is formed in such a manner that the dimension of the above is shortened as it approaches the overhanging end, and has a strip-shaped portion formed in a curved surface shape with both side surfaces in the width direction recessed toward the decorative member side.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, when the light moving along the low transmittance part crosses the band-shaped part, both side surfaces of the band-shaped part are recessed toward the decorative member side. Due to the action of the concave surface shape formed by being formed in a shape, the strip-shaped portion is reduced in the width direction and visually recognized. Therefore, the outer shape of the light to be moved can be reduced in the process of movement, or the reduced state can be returned to the original state to change the outer shape of the light.

In the game machine D3, the strip-shaped portion is formed on one side of the low-transmittance portion in the low-transmittance portion of at least one of the decorative members, and the formation position of the band upper portion and the one side thereof. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the formation position of the band-shaped portion formed on the other side, which is the opposite side, is shifted in the extending direction of the low transmittance portion.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, when the light is visually recognized in a mode of being moved along the low transmittance part, one of the width directions of one low transmittance part is obtained. While the outer shape of the light is reduced on the side, the outer shape of the light is maintained on the other side, which is the opposite side of the other side, so that the outer shape of the light changes on both sides in the width direction of one low transmittance portion. Is different, so that it is possible to easily determine the change in the outer shape of the light.

<An example of the technical idea of using the shadow of a sphere to produce light>
A game machine E1 characterized in that a ball flows down in any of the game machines A0 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C9, or D1 to D4 while blocking the light emitted from the light irradiating device.

According to the game machine E1, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A0 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C9, or D1 to D4, the light emitted from the light irradiation device is blocked by the sphere, so that it is visually recognized. The shadow of the sphere is generated in the light, and as a result, the shape of the visually recognized light can be changed.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a diffusion member arranged on the game board and a light irradiation device arranged on the back side of the diffusion member are provided, and the light emitted from the light irradiation device is emitted. There is a gaming machine that is diffused by a diffusion member and illuminates a decorative member arranged on the front side of the diffusion member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-113910). However, in the conventional game machine described above, the mode in which the light emitted from the light irradiation device is visually recognized by the player is limited. That is, for example, the position where the diffusing member is illuminated is determined by the position of the light source of the light irradiation device, and the position where the diffusing member is illuminated (light pattern) does not change no matter how much the light emitting state of the light source is changed. Therefore, the mode of light visually recognized by the player is limited, and there is a problem that the effect of the light emitted from the light irradiation device is limited.

Therefore, the applicant of the present application has arranged a tubular member on the front side of the light irradiation device in addition to the above-mentioned gaming machine, and a pattern is formed by the difference in the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member. , A gaming machine has been developed in which the visible pattern is changed by the rotation of the tubular member, and the way the tubular member shines is changed (not known at the time of filing the application of the present application). However, in this case, the shape of the light visually recognized through the tubular member depends on the shape of the tubular member, so that the pattern changes regularly depending on the intensity of the brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member. There was a problem that the effect of the production was limited.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since the flowing sphere blocks the light emitted by the light irradiating device, a shadow is cast on the light visually recognized at the flowing portion of the sphere, and the pattern of the visually recognized light is changed. be able to. In addition, the shadows created by the spheres blocking the light are visually recognized in various ways depending on the number of spheres flowing down and the position of the spheres flowing down, so it is possible to increase the types of patterns depending on the intensity of the brightness of the light. It is possible to improve the effect of production.

The game machine E2 is characterized in that a plurality of paths through which the ball flows down are formed in the game machine E1.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine E1, a plurality of routes through which the ball flows down are prepared. Therefore, it is possible to change the movement path of the shadow of the visually recognized sphere by changing the path through which the sphere flows.

The game machine E2 includes a decorative member which is arranged in a manner of shielding the tubular member and has a light transmitting portion, and the decorative member is inclined with respect to the axis of the tubular member to form a plurality of rows. The gaming machine E3 has a low transmittance portion which is a portion having low light transmittance, and the path can be formed on a side surface of the decorative member on the side of the tubular member.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the decorative member is used for both the purpose of dividing the light by the low transmittance portion and the use of changing the flow path of the ball. Therefore, the number of required members to be arranged can be reduced as compared with the case where the flow path of the sphere is changed by arranging a member different from the decorative member, so that the material cost and the assembly cost can be suppressed. it can.

In the game machine E3, the low transmittance portion of the tubular member projects outward in the radial direction of the tubular member to form a double helix, and a position where a ball flowing down in a predetermined path can come into contact with the tubular member. The tubular member is rotatably formed by abutting the sphere on the low transmittance portion of the tubular member, and the low transmittance portion formed in the double helix shape. When the sphere comes into contact with the spiral low transmittance portion on one side, the sphere flows down the path 1 formed on the decorative member, while the spiral low transmittance on the one side. When the sphere is brought into contact with the other spiral low transmittance portion different from the portion, the game is characterized in that the sphere flows down by a route different from the path 1 formed on the decorative member. Machine E4.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3, which position of the tubular member the ball abuts determines which of the plurality of paths the ball flows down. Can be changed to a plurality of flow paths after the sphere comes into contact with the tubular member while reaching the tubular member by a fixed path.

That is, for example, when a sphere is allowed to flow down along a plurality of paths formed in a decorative member, if it is necessary to prepare a member for guiding the sphere to each path, the number of necessary members increases. Further, when a sphere is branched into a plurality of paths from one path, it is necessary to dispose a branch path for branching the sphere in each path and a functional member such as a switch for changing the path in which the sphere flows down. As a result, material costs and assembly costs increase.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E4, even when the ball is guided to reach the tubular member by a certain path, the posture of the tubular member is changed by rotating the tubular member. , The location of the tubular member that comes into contact with the sphere is changed. As a result, the low transmittance portion of the tubular member with which the sphere is in contact is selected by one spiral low transmittance portion and the other spiral low transmittance portion, and the sphere is decorated accordingly. The flow path of the sphere is changed depending on whether it flows down one path formed on the member or another path. That is, it is possible to eliminate the need for a member that guides the sphere to each path while maintaining the effect of causing the sphere to flow down in a plurality of paths. Therefore, it is possible to change the flow path after the sphere comes into contact with the tubular member in a plurality of ways while reducing the material cost and the assembly cost.

A game machine F1 in any of game machines A0 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C9, D1 to D4, or E1 to E4, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and when the stop It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine F2, characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C9, D1 to D4, or E1 to E4. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines A0 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C9, D1 to D4, or E1 to E4, the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Machine F3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the above, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "
<Others>
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a diffusion member arranged on the game board and a light irradiation device arranged on the back side of the diffusion member are provided, and the light emitted from the light irradiation device is emitted by the diffusion member. There is known a gaming machine that is diffused and illuminates a decorative member arranged on the front side of the diffusion member (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-113910).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the mode in which the light emitted from the light irradiation device is visually recognized by the player is limited. That is, for example, the position where the diffusing member is illuminated is determined by the position of the light source of the light irradiation device, and the position where the diffusing member is illuminated (light pattern) does not change no matter how much the light emitting state of the light source is changed. Therefore, the mode of light visually recognized by the player is limited, and there is a problem that the effect of the light emitted from the light irradiation device is limited.
Therefore, the applicant of the present application has arranged a tubular member on the front side of the light irradiation device in addition to the above-mentioned gaming machine, and a pattern is formed by the difference in the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member. , A gaming machine has been developed in which the visible pattern is changed by the rotation of the tubular member, and the way the tubular member shines is changed (not known at the time of filing the application of the present application). However, in this case, it is suitable to visually recognize the light as if it is moved in the axial direction or the direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular member, but for example, it is visually recognized that the light is moved in the direction inclined to the axial center. It had the problem that it was difficult to make it.
The present technical idea was made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and the light emitted toward the tubular member is moved in a direction inclined with respect to the axial center of the tubular member. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can be visually recognized by a player in such an manner.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the game machine of the technical idea 1 has a tubular member that is rotatably supported by the game board and has a light transmitting portion, and light irradiation that irradiates light toward the tubular member. The device is provided with a device and a decorative member having a light transmitting portion while being arranged in a manner of shielding the tubular member. The tubular member is a portion having a low light transmittance, and the tubular member is provided. The game board is provided with a low transmittance portion formed in a spiral shape along the peripheral surface of the light beam and formed in such a manner that the position visually recognized in one direction is changed by rotating the tubular member. It is rotated by transmitting the kinetic energy of the flowing sphere, and the light emitted from the light irradiating device is visually recognized through the tubular member, and the decorative member is a portion having low light transmittance and is a plurality of parts. It has a low transmittance portion that is formed in a row and extends in a strip shape along a direction inclined with respect to the axial center of the tubular member.
The fact that the tubular member has a light transmitting portion means that the tubular member has a portion that transmits light at least in a part. In this sense, the mode of the tubular member is not particularly limited, and for example, the tubular member itself may be formed of a light-transmitting material, or the tubular member shields light from the light-transmitting material. It may be formed from the material to be used.
The fact that the decorative member has a light transmitting portion means that the decorative member has a portion that transmits light at least in a part. In this sense, the mode of the decorative member is not particularly limited, and for example, the decorative member itself may be formed of a light-transmitting material, and the decorative member includes a light-transmitting material and a material that shields light. May be formed from.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the cross-sectional shape of the decorative member on a plane perpendicular to the extending direction of the low transmittance portion of the decorative member is the plurality of the decorative members. Among the low transmittance parts of the row, it is formed in a concave shape between the adjacent low transmittance parts.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, in which the decorative member is extended so as to intersect the low transmittance portion of the decorative member formed in a plurality of rows. In addition, the width direction of the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the extension direction is shortened as it approaches the overhanging end, and both side surfaces in the width direction are formed in a curved surface shape recessed toward the decorative member. It is provided with a strip-shaped portion to be formed.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 4, the strip-shaped portion is formed on one side of the low transmittance portion of at least one of the decorative members in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3. The forming position of the upper portion of the band and the forming position of the band-shaped portion formed on the other side opposite to the one side are shifted in the extending direction of the low transmittance portion.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, a plurality of rows of low-transmittance portions are formed on the decorative member arranged in a manner of shielding the tubular member so as to be inclined to the axis of the tubular member. Light that is visually recognized in a mode in which the low transmittance portion of the tubular member is moved in the axial direction of the tubular member due to the rotation of the tubular member and is moved in the axial direction of the tubular member. , It can be visually recognized by the player in a manner of being moved along the low transmittance portion of the decorative member.
Further, by rotating the tubular member, the position of the low transmittance portion in one-way view is changed. Therefore, the rotation of the tubular member changes the distribution of the degree of brightness of the light emitted from the light irradiator, which is visually recognized through the tubular member in one-way view. That is, since the pattern formed by the difference in the degree of brightness of the light visually recognized through the tubular member can be changedly formed, it is possible to increase the mode of producing the light emitted from the light irradiating device.
Further, the tubular member is rotated by the kinetic energy of the ball flowing down the game board. Therefore, since a drive motor for rotating the tubular member is not required, the power cost required for rotating the tubular member can be reduced.
Further, the tubular member can be installed in a space-saving manner because the drive motor is not arranged. That is, the space for arranging the accessory such as the tubular member on the front side of the game board or the back side of the game board is limited to a certain range, but the drive motor for rotating the tubular member does not need to be arranged. The usable space can be utilized as a space for arranging other moving accessories. Therefore, the degree of freedom in disposing of other moving accessories can be improved.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 1, the cross-sectional shape between the adjacent low transmittance portions of the decorative members is formed in a concave shape. The light visually recognized through the concave-shaped portion is visually recognized in a mode of being reduced in the direction connecting the adjacent low-transmittance portions due to the action of the concave surface shape. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine the boundary of the light divided by the low transmittance unit.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2, when the light moving along the low transmittance portion crosses the strip-shaped portion, the strip-shaped portion Due to the action of the concave surface shape formed by forming both side surfaces of the above in a curved surface shape recessed on the decorative member side, the strip-shaped portion is reduced in the width direction and visually recognized. Therefore, the outer shape of the light to be moved can be reduced in the process of movement, or the reduced state can be returned to the original state to change the outer shape of the light.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 3, when the light is visually recognized in a mode of being moved along the low transmittance portion, one low transmittance is obtained. In the width direction of the rate part, the outer shape of the light is reduced on one side, while the outer shape of the light is maintained on the other side, which is the opposite side of the other side. Since the change in the outer shape of the light is different on both sides in the width direction of the light, it is possible to easily discriminate the change in the outer shape of the light.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board 1200, 2200, 3200, 4200, 5200 Cylindrical member 1230, 2230, 3230 Low transmittance part 1232 Concave side surface part (both sides)
1231 Overhanging end 1240, 2240, 3240 Peripheral surface 1400, 2400, 4400 Light irradiation device 1410, 2410 Base 1420, 1421, 1423 Light source 1500, 2500 Decorative member 1511, 2511 Low transmittance part 1512, 2512 Band-shaped part 2233 Bent part 2531 Branch groove (path through which the ball flows down)
3300 Transmission unit 3310 First collision surface (collision surface)
3320 Second collision surface (collision surface)
4430 Refractive member M position

Claims (4)

A tubular member that is rotatably supported by the game board and has a light transmitting portion, a light irradiating device that irradiates light toward the tubular member, and an embodiment that shields the tubular member. Along with, a decorative member having a light transmitting portion, and
The tubular member is a portion having a low light transmittance, is formed in a spiral shape along the peripheral surface of the tubular member, and is a position visually recognized in one direction by rotating the tubular member. It is provided with a low transmittance portion formed in such a manner that the light is changed, and is rotated by transmitting the kinetic energy of a ball flowing down the game board, and the light emitted from the light irradiation device is passed through the tubular member. Visible,
The decorative member is a portion having low light transmittance, and is formed in a plurality of rows and has a low transmittance portion extending in a strip shape along a direction inclined with respect to the axial center of the tubular member. A gaming machine characterized by having. The cross-sectional shape of the decorative member in a plane perpendicular to the extending direction of the low transmittance portion of the decorative member is between the adjacent low transmittance portions of the plurality of rows of the low transmittance portions of the decorative member. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is formed in a concave shape. The decorative member is extended so as to intersect the low transmittance portion of the decorative member formed in a plurality of rows, and the widthwise dimension of the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the extending direction is shortened as it approaches the overhanging end. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein both side surfaces in the width direction are formed in a curved shape formed in a concave shape on the decorative member side. The band-shaped portion is formed on one side of the low transmittance portion of the low transmittance portion of at least one of the decorative members, and the other side opposite to the formation position of the upper portion of the band. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the strip-shaped portion is formed so as to be displaced from the forming position of the strip-shaped portion in the extending direction of the low transmittance portion.